You are on page 1of 268

PSS®SINCAL 16.

0
Protection Coordination
Protection Coordination in Electrical Networks

Published by
Siemens AG
Smart Infrastructure
Digital Grid
Freyeslebenstraße 1
91058 Erlangen, Germany
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Preface

Preface

The PSS SINCAL manuals can be divided into the following parts:

● the PSS SINCAL System Manual


● manuals for Electrical and Pipe Networks
● the Database Description
● the Automation Manual

The PSS SINCAL System Manual contains a general description for using the application.

The technical manuals for Electrical Networks contain detailed descriptions of the various
calculation methods for electrical networks - such as load flow, or short circuit calculations - and
their input data.

The technical manuals for Pipe Networks contain detailed descriptions of the various calculation
methods for pipe networks - water, gas and heating/cooling - and their input data.

The Database Description contains a complete description of the data models for electrical and
pipe networks.

The Automation manual contains the documentation of the automation functions for PSS SINCAL.

Copyright

This manual and all the information and illustrations contained in it are copyrighted.

SIEMENS retains all rights, in particular the right to publish, translate, reprint, photocopy, make
microcopies or electronically store in a database.

Previously expressed written permission from SIEMENS is required for any reproduction or use
beyond the limits specified by copyright law.

Warranty

Even though our manuals are thoroughly checked for errors, no liability can be taken for errors
found or any resulting problems or difficulties. Modifications are frequently made to the text and the
software as a part of our routine updates.

PSS® is a registered trademark of SIEMENS AG


Copyright SIEMENS AG 2019 All Rights Reserved
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Table of Contents

1. Introduction to Protection Coordination 11

2. Protection Simulation 26

2.1 OC Protection Devices 30


2.1.1 Pickup OC Protection Devices 31
2.1.2 Characteristic-Curve Tripping 33
2.1.3 First Instantaneous Tripping 34
2.1.4 Second instantaneous Tripping 35
2.1.5 Third Instantaneous Tripping 36
2.1.6 Measurement Transformer Influence 37
2.1.7 Composition of the Characteristic Curve 38
2.1.8 Combination of Characteristics with a Recloser 40
2.1.9 Switching Sequence with a Recloser 41
2.1.10 Determining Intersection for Double Logarithmic Coordinates 42
2.1.11 Determining the State of Protection Devices 43
2.1.12 Graphic Display with Diagrams 44
2.1.13 Graphic Display with Legends 46
2.1.14 Importing and Exporting Protection Device Settings 46
2.1.15 Importing Protection Device Setting from PDMS 48
2.2 Types of OC Protection Devices 50
2.2.1 Creating a New OC Protection Device Type 50
2.2.2 Editing OC Protection Device Types 50
2.2.3 Creating and Configuring OC Protection Device Types 53
2.2.4 Copying OC Protection Device Types 54
2.2.5 Configuring OC Protection Device Types 54
2.2.6 Assigning the OC Protection Device Type 71
2.2.7 Special Protection Device Types 72
2.3 Distance-Protection Devices 73
2.3.1 Shapes of Impedance Areas 73
2.3.2 Pickup Distance Protection Devices 76
2.3.3 Tripping with Distance Protection Devices 78
2.3.4 Measurement Transformer Influence 78
2.3.5 Impedance Loops 80

October 2019
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Table of Contents

2.3.6 Determining the State of Distance-Protection Device 86


2.3.7 PSS SINCAL Diagrams 86
2.4 Differential Protection Devices 88
2.4.1 Differential Protection Zones 88
2.4.2 Simplified Model 90
2.4.3 Device Model 91
2.4.4 Assignment of Measuring Points 97
2.5 Voltage Protection 99
2.5.1 Undervoltage Protection 99
2.5.2 Overvoltage Protection 100
2.6 Frequency Protection 100
2.7 Malfunction 101
2.8 Teleprotection 101
2.8.1 Signals at Protection Devices 102
2.8.2 Signals for Zones 103
2.8.3 Signal Interlock for Zones 104
2.8.4 Example for Blocked Tripping 105
2.9 Loop Selection 106
2.10 Checking of Destruction through Overheating 107
2.11 Determining Tripping and Waiting Times for Protection Devices 108
2.11.1 Sequence to Determine Times 108
2.11.2 Time Register of the Delay Times 109
2.11.3 Determining Clearing Times for Faults 111
2.11.4 Distance Protection Tripping due to Phase-Fault Setting 111
2.11.5 Distance Protection Tripping due to Ground-Fault Setting 112
2.11.6 Distance Protection Tripping for Load Current 112
2.12 Recommendations and Warnings 112

3. Protection Routes 113

3.1 Determining the Protection Routes 113


3.2 Determining the Tripping Behavior 114
3.3 Control Data for Protection Routes 114
3.4 Results of the Protection Routes 115

October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Table of Contents

4. Protection Device Settings 121

4.1 Supported Protection Device Types 122


4.1.1 How Distance Protection Devices Work 123
4.1.2 Circular Tripping Areas 124
4.1.3 Quadrilateral-Shaped Tripping Areas 124
4.1.4 Common 125
4.1.5 7SA500, 7SA501 and 7SA502 126
4.1.6 7SA510, 7SA511 and 7SA513 127
4.1.7 7SA522 128
4.1.8 7SA610, 7SA611, 7SA612, 7SA631 and 7SA632 129
4.1.9 7SA64 130
4.1.10 7SA84, 7SA86 and 7SA87 132
4.1.11 7SL13 133
4.1.12 7SL17, 7SL24, 7SL70 and 7SL73 134
4.1.13 7ST6 135
4.1.14 EPAC3100, EPAC3400, EPAC3500, EPAC3600 and EPAC3700 137
4.1.15 GRL100 138
4.1.16 LZ91 and LZ92 140
4.1.17 MiCOM P43x 141
4.1.18 MiCOM P44x 142
4.1.19 MiCOM P54x 143
4.1.20 PD531 and PD551 144
4.1.21 PD532 and PD552 145
4.1.22 R1KZ4, R1KZ4A, RK4 and RK4A 147
4.1.23 R1KZ7 and R1KZ7G 148
4.1.24 R1Z25, R1Z25A and R1Z23B 149
4.1.25 R1Z27 150
4.1.26 RD10 151
4.1.27 RED670 152
4.1.28 REF630 153
4.1.29 REL316 157
4.1.30 REL511, REL521 and REL561 158
4.1.31 SD124 159

October 2019
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Table of Contents

4.1.32 SD135 160


4.1.33 SD135A 161
4.1.34 SD14, SD14A and SD14B 162
4.1.35 SD34A 163
4.1.36 SD35 164
4.1.37 SD35A and SD35C 165
4.1.38 SD36 165
4.1.39 SEL311A 166
4.1.40 SEL311B 167
4.1.41 SEL311C1, SEL311C2, SEL311C3 and SEL321 168
4.2 Calculation Method 169
4.2.1 Entries for Determining Impedance 170
4.2.2 Type of Measurement 176
4.2.3 Selective Grading Factors 186
4.2.4 DISTAL Strategy 187
4.2.5 Line Impedance Strategy 192
4.2.6 Line Impedance Strategy Connected 194
4.2.7 Medium-Voltage Network Strategy 194
4.3 Results of Settings Calculations 196
4.4 Hints and Cautions 198

5. Determining Fault Locations 199

5.1 Determining Fault Locations with Data of the Protection Devices 199
5.2 Determining Fault Locations with Data of the Measured Values 199
5.3 Starting the Determining Fault Locations 201
5.4 Results of Determining Fault Locations 201

6. Dimensioning 206

6.1 Calculation Methods 207

7. Protection Analysis 214

7.1 Process Description for Protection Analysis 214


7.2 Control Data for Protection Analysis 217

October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Table of Contents

7.3 Results of the Protection Analysis 221

8. Check OC Settings 229

8.1 Settings Verification 229


8.1.1 Implementation of the Check Functions 231
8.1.2 Results of the Check Function 232
8.2 k Factor Verification 236
8.2.1 Implementation of the Check Functions 238
8.2.2 Results of the Check Function 240

9. Results of the Determining Fault Locations 245

10. Examples 246

10.1 Example for Protection Coordination 246


10.1.1 Presetting Calculation Settings 247
10.1.2 Creating Protection Devices 247
10.1.3 Making Fault Observations 250
10.1.4 Making Fault Events 251
10.1.5 Determining Settings for DI Protection Devices 252
10.1.6 Checking Tripping Behavior for Protection Devices 256
10.1.7 Starting the Protection Simulation 256
10.1.8 Displaying and Evaluating the Results 258
10.1.9 Generating Protection Routes 260
10.2 Example for Creating Protection Documentation 264
10.2.1 Selecting Grading 266
10.2.2 Creating the Protection Documentation 266
10.2.3 Customizing a Diagram 268

October 2019
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Table of Contents

October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Introduction to Protection Coordination

1. Introduction to Protection Coordination

Faults can never be prevented completely in electrical transmission and distribution networks.
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination, however, has been designed to limit most of the effects of
faults to assure continued operation of the network.

The main goals of PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination are:

● To keep the network operational


When there is a fault, you want to shut down only a minimum amount of equipment to isolate
the fault.
● To prevent the problem from spreading
When there is a fault, a lack of selectivity or overloading can cause the problem to spread.
● To protect the main equipment of the network
Your priority is protecting the most important and most expensive equipment in the network
(generators, transformers, etc.) from the fault.

PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination offers a wide range of procedures covering the complex field
of protecting or examining electrical transmission and distribution networks.

This manual contains the following chapters:

● Protection Simulation
● Protection Routes
● Protection Device Settings
● Determining Fault Locations
● Dimensioning
● Protection Analysis
● Check OC Settings
● Examples

Protection Simulation

PSS SINCAL Protection Simulation calculates the current, voltage, power and impedance in case
of

● 1-phase ground fault (based on VDE or IEC specifications),


● 2-phase ground fault (based on VDE or IEC specifications),
● 2-phase short circuit (based on VDE or IEC specifications),
● 3-phase short circuit (based on VDE or IEC specifications),
● Multiple faults (similar to VDE or IEC specifications) and
● Stability

and links these to the setting for the protection device. It is also possible to take the initial load state
for short circuits and ground faults into consideration.

Currents and voltages from the calculations above and the calculated impedances are then used to
determine the pickup protection devices.

October 2019 11
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Introduction to Protection Coordination

Generating Diagrams of Protection Routes

PSS SINCAL can generate protection-route diagrams so that you can check that protection devices
have been set properly.

Determining Settings for Protection Devices

This simulation procedure determines how distance protection devices are set. The various types
of protection-device types in the network and their selective grading factors are used to calculate
the values actually set at the protection device.

Determining Fault Locations

PSS SINCAL Determining Fault Locations lets you locate a fault in the supply network.
PSS SINCAL calculates this position from the values registered at the protection device at the
moment the fault takes place.

Dimensioning

Low-Voltage Dimensioning calculates minimum 1-phase short circuit currents in low voltage
networks. Load flow is determined in the load flow part of the program; minimum 1-phase short
circuit current is determined in the short circuit part of the program. The user must keep in mind
that the rated fuse current must be larger than the load current yet smaller than the minimum
permissible 1-phase short circuit current in fuse records. PSS SINCAL shows the user any possible
discrepancies in the VDE safeguards.

Protection Analysis

The Protection Analysis program checks the clearing of faults in the first zone of the protection
devices. The results are shown in color and in tabular form. This table makes it possible to check
the correct setting of the protection devices.

Protection Coordination Procedure

To process protection coordination or create special data for the protection coordination, the
Calculation Method for Protection Device Coordination must first be switched ON.

The following steps are necessary:

● Create and define the tripping behavior of protection devices.


● Define the arc reserve to determine the settings in the network level data.
● Create fault observations.

Other steps are required, particularly for protection coordination based on the stability calculation:

● Determining the background conditions for dynamic calculation parameters:


The maximum of the stated end time and 60 seconds is used as the end time.
● Input of the behavior of the synchronous machines over time

12 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Introduction to Protection Coordination

Protection Simulation Based on the Short Circuit Calculation

The protection simulation is carried out for any fault observation. The specified fault or open circuit
for the fault observation is ignored. The short circuit which was selected at the start of the
protection simulation is calculated at the location of the fault observation.

The currents and voltages of the protection devices are determined by means of a short circuit
calculation. The pickup of the protection devices is defined with these currents and voltages. The
protection device with the shortest tripping time determines the time for the first loop.

The network is opened at the connection of the tripped protection device for the next loop and a
short circuit is calculated again with the resulting topology. The pickup of the devices can then be
re-examined. This process is repeated until no device picks up.

All open connections are then reclosed for the consideration of the next fault.

Inclusion of Decay Processes in Time Loops

When a fault occurs, the time for determining the reactances of machines equals zero. The fastest
tripping protection device is determined with the fault current at the time zero. This is the forecast
time for the next time loop.

If the network contains decaying machines, further calculations are carried out within the time loop.
The time division within the time loop is always recalculated depending on the fastest tripping time.

Half the time difference between the actual time and the tripping time of the fastest protection
device or at least 10 milliseconds is always taken as the time step within the time loop. The tripping
time of the fastest protection device is not exceeded here.

The decay of the currents of the machines is based on the simplified e -t/Ԏ function for both
synchronous and asynchronous machines. The current virtually does not change any more,
depending on the time constant Ԏ and the actual time. The value of the e-t/Ԏ function is monitored
to minimize the CPU processing time. If the function value goes towards zero, no further
calculations are required within the time loop. This primarily applies to asynchronous machines.

Time Loops with Decay Process up to Fault Clearance:

t=0 t = t1 t = t2 = tclr

Calculations for determining the tripping time

A total of 9 calculations are required for determining the clearance time.

Time loops with Decay Process only within the first Time Loop:

t=0 t = t1 t = t2 = tclr

Calculations for determining the tripping time

October 2019 13
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Introduction to Protection Coordination

Only 6 calculations in total are required for determining the clearance time.

Protection Simulation Based on the Multiple Fault Calculation

The protection simulation is carried out for each fault event. All fault observations of the fault event
are simulated in the network.

The currents and voltages of the protection devices are determined by means of a multiple fault
calculation. The pickup of the protection devices is defined with these currents and voltages. The
protection device with the shortest tripping time determines the time for the first loop.

The network is opened at the connection of the tripped protection device for the next loop and a
short circuit is calculated again with the resulting topology. The pickup of the devices can then be
re-examined. This process is repeated until no device picks up.

All open connections are then reclosed for the consideration of the next fault event.

The decay processes are included within time loops in the same way as for Protection Simulation
Based on the Short Circuit Calculation.

Protection Simulation Based on the Stability Calculation

The currents and voltages of the protection devices are determined through a stability calculation.
However, the execution of the protection simulation varies here according to the selected
calculation method.

3-Phase Short Circuit and Ground Fault, 2-Phase Short Circuit and Ground Fault, 1-
Phase Ground Fault

The protection simulation is carried out for each fault observation. The fault or open circuit stated
with the fault observation is ignored. All switch times are likewise ignored. At the location of the
fault observation the short circuit is calculated which was selected at the start of the protection
simulation. The short circuit occurs at the time t = 0.0.

If the pickup time of a protection device is permanently reached, this protection device trips and
determines also the time for the first time loop. For all other time steps of the stability calculation
the connection of the protection device that trips is opened. This process is repeated until the fault
current equals 0.0.

All open connections are then reclosed for the consideration of the next fault.

Fault Event

The protection simulation is carried out for each fault event. All fault observations of the fault event
are simulated in the network at the time t = 0.0. All switch times are ignored.

If the pickup time of a protection device is permanently reached, this protection device trips and
determines also the time for the first time loop. For all other time steps of the stability calculation
the connection of the protection device that trips is opened. This process is repeated until all fault
currents equal 0.0.

All open connections are then reclosed for the consideration of the next fault event.

14 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Introduction to Protection Coordination

Fault Sequence

The protection simulation is carried out for each fault event. All fault observations of the fault event
are simulated in the network at the specified time. All switch times are likewise simulated.

If the pickup time of a protection device is permanently reached, this protection device trips and
determines also the time for the first time loop. For all other time steps of the stability calculation
the connection of the protection device that trips is opened. This process is repeated until all fault
currents equal 0.0.

All open connections are then reclosed for the consideration of the next fault sequence.

Network Calculations

The speed with which network calculations can be made depends primarily on five factors:

● Network size
● Number of controlled elements
● Calculation type
● Available storage capacity

Using Load Flow to Determine Load Voltage

Before protection can be simulated, PSS SINCAL calculates the load flow to determine load
voltage. One reason is that PSS SINCAL needs this load voltage to determine the direction in the
protection simulation.

Determining Permanent Load Currents from Load Flow

Sometimes networks are displayed on a computer in such a way that the load flow problem is not
solvable.

Displaying the Networks for the Calculations

For a detailed description of how the networks are displayed for the calculations, see the chapter
Network Display in the Input Data Manual.

Definitions

Overcurrent Time Protection

PSS SINCAL Overcurrent Time Protection uses current as the criterion of protection, assuring that
the maximum operating current for the equipment is not exceeded for a long period of time. This
protects the network from thermal overloading, from fault currents and from excessive operating
currents.

In this manual, overcurrent time protection devices will also be called OC protection devices.

October 2019 15
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Introduction to Protection Coordination

Distance Protection

PSS SINCAL distance protection determines the distance from the protection device to the fault
location indirectly from the line impedance. The criterion of distance protection is impedance.
PSS SINCAL determines impedance by measuring the current and voltage at the ends of the
equipment to be protected. The amount of impedance is closer to the fault.

Selectivity

PSS SINCAL can detect a fault in the network and shut it off with minimum repercussions to the
network as a whole.

Protection Designations According to ANSI

The individual standards for the various tripping units have different designations.

The PSS SINCAL documentation always shows the available tripping units with the VDE
designations. This chapter shows the data screen forms of the available tripping units with the
corresponding ANSI codes.

ANSI 27 (Undervoltage ) and ANSI 59 (Overvoltage) each with up to 2 Trip


Operations

16 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Introduction to Protection Coordination

The ANSI 27 (marked in red) and ANSI 59 (marked in blue) trip operations are entered together in
one screen form.

For more detailed information, see the chapter on Data Descriptions, section Basic Data – Voltage
Protection Settings in the Input Data Manual.

ANSI 21 (DI Settings) with up to 6 Trip Operations

The tripping area of this ANSI 21 trip operation is matched to the relevant protection device type. It
can be: a circle, an impedance polygon and/or an MHO circle.

For more detailed information, see the chapter on Data Descriptions, section Basic Data – Distance
Protection Settings in the Input Data Manual.

October 2019 17
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Introduction to Protection Coordination

ANSI 21 (DI Setting Values User-Defined) with up to 3 Trip Operations

The tripping area of this ANSI 21 tripping is not matched to a protection device type. This is a
rectangle in the first or in all quadrants of the R/X level.

18 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Introduction to Protection Coordination

ANSI 81 (Frequency Protection) with up to 4 Trip Operations

The ANSI 81 trip operation is entered for underfrequency and overfrequency jointly in one screen
form.

● Blue: ANSI 81H (f> upper frequency)


● Red: ANSI 81L (f< lower frequency step 1)
● Green: ANSI 81L (f<< lower frequency step 2)
● Yellow: ANSI 81L (f<<< lower frequency step 3)

For more detailed information, see the chapter on Data Descriptions, section Basic Data –
Protection Frequency Settings in the Input Data Manual.

October 2019 19
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Introduction to Protection Coordination

ANSI 87 (DIFF Setting Values)

All the protection devices of a differential protection area are included for the ANSI 87 trip
operation.

● Blue: ANSI 87 (Base tripping)


● Red: ANSI 87 (High set tripping)

For more detailed information, see the chapter on Data Descriptions, section Basic Data –
Differential Protection Settings in the Input Data Manual.

20 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Introduction to Protection Coordination

ANSI 50/51/50HS/67 (OC Setting Values – Phase)

The ANSI 50/51/50HS/67 trip operation is entered jointly in one screen form.

● Blue: ANSI 51
● Red: ANSI 50/67 (Instantaneous)
● Green: ANSI 50HS (Instantaneous)

For more detailed information, see the chapter on Data Descriptions, section Phase – Overcurrent
Protection Settings in the Input Data Manual.

October 2019 21
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Introduction to Protection Coordination

ANSI 50N/51N/50NS/67N (OC Setting Values – Ground)

The ANSI 50N/51N/50NS/67N trip operation is entered jointly in one screen form.

● Blue: ANSI 51N


● Red: ANSI 50N/67N (Instantaneous)
● Green: ANSI 50NS (Instantaneous)

For more detailed information, see the chapter on Data Descriptions, section Ground – Overcurrent
Protection Settings in the Input Data Manual.

22 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Introduction to Protection Coordination

Load Cone and Load Blinder for Phase and Ground Tripping

This dialog box can be used to define an impedance area. The upper (X+A) and the lower (X-A)
horizontal limit of the area corresponds to the Load Blinder. The Load Cone is defined with RA1,
RA2 and PHI.

For more detailed information, see the chapter on Protection Simulation, section SIEMENS Areas.

October 2019 23
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Introduction to Protection Coordination

Direction Determination

The direction setting is used for all tripping units with a direction decision.

For more detailed information, see the chapter on Data Descriptions, section Directional Element –
Protection Location in the Input Data Manual.

24 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Introduction to Protection Coordination

Pickup

The pickup of every protection device is checked before the checking of the tripping units. The
tripping units are only checked if no pickup is activated or at least one pickup condition is fulfilled.

For more detailed information, see the chapter on Data Descriptions, section Phase – Pickup in the
Input Data Manual.

October 2019 25
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

2. Protection Simulation

PSS SINCAL Protection Simulation can be used to simulate electrical networks with serial and
shunt admittance, source voltages for generators, tripping characteristics for protection devices,
and permissible short circuit currents for the equipment. These devices determine the maximum
short circuit currents. PSS SINCAL searches for tripping sequences and times for protection
devices when the network has overcurrents. PSS SINCAL can also simulate, at arbitrary
intersection nodes or in lines, overcurrents caused by short circuits.

PSS SINCAL Short Circuit calculates overcurrents with referred impedance (reference power 1
MVA) and uses symmetrical components to calculate 1-phase faults.

General Remarks to Protection Simulation

PSS SINCAL can easily simulate a wide variety of problems in day-to-day network operations. The
range of applications is not limited to the specific problems and needs of network operators.

Like other PSS SINCAL calculation procedures, PSS SINCAL Overcurrent Protection can calculate
the following types of networks in a single operation:

● Utility and industrial networks


● Meshed and/or radial networks
● Medium- and low-voltage networks
● Networks with several voltage levels
● Subnetworks with separate supply

The currents and voltages are determined with the PSS SINCAL short circuit, multiple fault and
stability calculation. PSS SINCAL Protection Simulation examines the following kinds of faults:

● 1-phase ground fault


● 2-phase ground fault
● 2-phase short circuit
● 3-phase short circuit
● Double and multiple fault
● Currents with and without initial load
● Currents involving line couplings in the zero-phase-sequence
● Currents involving a neutrally connected transformer in the zero-phase-sequence

PSS SINCAL Protection Simulation can:

● Observe various types of protection devices (overcurrent protection, distance protection)


● Define faults anywhere in nodes or lines
● Augment protection-device catalogues to meet individual needs
● Observe more than one time interval to clear the fault
● Consider directional elements with freely definable ranges in its calculations
● Consider fault impedance
● Display tripping curves for protection devices, relative to their smallest node voltage, in a
double logarithmic current-time diagram
● Display more than one subnetwork or network level in a double logarithmic current-time
diagram

26 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

● Display the impedance of more than one protection device in more than one subnetwork in the
R-X diagram
● Use load current to check for tripping errors
● Display tripping characteristics, tripping currents and damage curves in a double logarithmic
current-time diagram

PSS SINCAL Protection Simulation can be used to:

● Determine fault-clearing times at any of the fault locations


● Monitor the selectivity of protection devices
● Check selective gradings for protection devices
● Verify the thermal load of the equipment
● Investigate tripping errors occurring in normal network operation

October 2019 27
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Calculation Procedures for Protection Simulation

Download and check all network data

Calculate load flow

Check, if protection devices get energized under load current

Set protection devices to "not energized"


and initialize loop counter to 1

Wait for the command "continue if loop counter is greater than 1"

Generate switches for all open protection devices

Calculate fault currents, voltages and impedances

Assign fault currents, voltages and


impedances to protection devices

Determine opening times for protection devices

Determine states of protection


devices (tripped, energized, inactive)

Are there any more energized Yes


protection devices?

No
No Is current at fault Yes
observation equal to 0?

Fault Fault cannot


disconnected be disconnected

Protection Devices

PSS SINCAL Protection Simulation recognizes the following kinds of protection devices:

OC Protection Devices

● Circuit Breakers with Measurement Transformers


● Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers
● Fuses
● Bi-Metallic Circuit Breakers

28 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

● Contactors
● Trip Fuses

Distance Protection Devices

● Distance Protection Devices

Differential Protection Devices

● Differential Protection Devices

PSS SINCAL can simulate these protection devices at any of the network elements.

Checking Load Energizing

Because of the different load conditions, PSS SINCAL increases the current by a safety margin or
reduces the impedance by a safety margin when it checks energizing from the load current. For
network level data, these safety parameters are set in the Protection tab.

OC Protection Devices

PSS SINCAL calculates the load current margin as follows to check the energizing:

1.0 + 𝑓𝐼
𝐼𝑝𝑟𝑓 = 𝐼𝑙𝑓 × ( )
100.0

If the resulting test current passes through the protection device’s current-time curve, the load is
energized.

Distance Protection Devices

PSS SINCAL reduces loop impedances from load voltage and load current as follows:

1.0 + 𝑓𝑍
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑓 = 𝑍𝑙𝑓 × ( )
100.0

PSS SINCAL uses an angle to create the following test impedance area from impedance and
reduced loop for load energizing impedance.

October 2019 29
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Zlf

Zprf
+
-

If the test impedance area superimposes a protection device’s tripping area, the load is energized.

Energizing

The check PSS SINCAL makes depends on the type of the energizing. For current energizing
without tripping, or in directional and non-directional current energizing, PSS SINCAL uses the
admitted load current. For area energizing, PSS SINCAL uses the test impedance area.

2.1 OC Protection Devices


Each OC protection device has a characteristic curve made up of segments. Segments can be
combined to create tripping characteristics for any type of protection device. Individual segments
are active or inactive, depending on the type of protection device. PSS SINCAL Protection
Simulation recognizes the following type of OC protection device.

● Circuit breakers with measurement transformers


● Low-voltage circuit breakers
● Fuses
● Bi-metallic circuit breakers
● Contactors
● Trip fuses
● Recloser

The phase current, positive-phase sequence current or negative-phase sequence current can be
used (selection via Phase, Pos. or Neg.) as current for the phase tripping. The return conductor
current (three times zero current) is used for the ground tripping.

An overcurrent tripping is triggered if the current across the protection device crosses its tripping
characteristic curve. An undercurrent tripping (selection -) is triggered if the current across the
protection device does not intersect the protection device.

PSS SINCAL recreates the characteristic tripping curve for all OC protection devices in the same
way.

30 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

Characteristics

All protection devices have a segmented tripping characteristic curve. Individual segments are
assigned separate tripping characteristics for phase and ground faults as follows:

● Characteristic-curve tripping
● First instantaneous tripping
● Second instantaneous tripping
● Third instantaneous tripping

PSS SINCAL automatically specifies the individual segments of the characteristic curve depending
on the type of protection device. Switches can be used to deactivate individual segments. A higher
resolution can limit the previous resolution (selection Lim). The effect of the limit on the tripping
characteristic curve is described in chapter Composition of the Characteristic Curve.

If the protection device is connected to the network via measurement transformer, the following can
also influence how the device trips:

● Rated current for the primary measurement transformer


● Rated current for the secondary measurement transformer
● Incoming current at the protection device

Protection devices connected to the network via measurement transformers can also have
directional elements. In this case, the direction set for the current’s angle determines how the
device trips.

For all these options, PSS SINCAL considers directional elements, intermediate transformers,
delays, percentages, etc.

If an additional time is set, the OC protection device is not tripped over the time calculated from the
current/time characteristic, but from the total of both times.

2.1.1 Pickup OC Protection Devices

Modern protection devices can have various kinds of pickup conditions:

● Current pickup
● Underimpedance pickup
● Undervoltage pickup
● Impedance pickup – area pickup

Each of these conditions also has an end time. If the device has not tripped before this time, then it
trips automatically.

For a detailed description of the pickup input data, see the section on Pickup in the chapter on
Protection Coordination in the Input Data Manual.

Current Pickup

This condition is fulfilled when values drop below a minimum current. Simply going below this
current fulfills the condition.

October 2019 31
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

PSS SINCAL supports three different types of current pickup:

● Directional current pickup (without tripping).


This type of pickup considers the setting for the direction (forwards, backwards). There is no
final time, so the protection device does not necessarily trip.
● Directional current pickup.
This type of pickup considers the setting for the direction (forwards, backwards).
● Non-directional current pickup

Underimpedance Pickup

Several conditions have to be fulfilled before there is underimpedance pickup.

● Exceeding the limits of minimum current I> and


● Being below the voltages V> until V>> at a current of between I> and I>>
● Exceeding the current I>>

V
Inactive

V>>
V>
Energized

I
I> I>>

Undervoltage Pickup

The condition is fulfilled, when the voltage is below the defined minimum voltage V< and the
current is above the defined value I>.

Inactive Inactive

V<
Inactive Energized

I
I>

Impedance Pickup – Area Pickup

With impedance pickup, the impedance registered by the protection device must be within a
prescribed impedance area to meet the pickup condition. A SIEMENS area describes this type of
pickup.

The pickup area can be assigned two different final times (directional and non-directional).

32 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

2.1.2 Characteristic-Curve Tripping

The tripping characteristics are defined by a curve with double logarithmic current-time axes.
Depending on the type of protection device, current and time values are shown as:

● Absolute values (fuses)


● Standard values (bi-metallic circuit breakers, circuit breakers with transformers, etc.)

The characteristic-curve tripping is activated via the Tripping Ip field.

Absolute values for tripping characteristics cannot be modified. When the operator enters a
differently rated current, PSS SINCAL automatically selects other tripping characteristics.

The following illustration shows tripping characteristics for fuses with different rated currents.

In1 In2

Multiplying the settings for current or time changes the standard values for a characteristic curve,
moving the characteristic curve either horizontally or vertically in the current-time diagram. When
the operator enters different tripping characteristics, PSS SINCAL automatically selects a different
standard characteristic curve.

PSS SINCAL can display currents for standard characteristic curves:

● In amperes
● Relative to the rated current

The current for the tripping is then:

● Current = norm x setting


● Current = norm x setting x rated current

PSS SINCAL always displays the time value for the tripping as:

● Norm x setting

October 2019 33
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

The following illustration shows a standard characteristic curve for a protection device.

The following illustration shows a standard characteristic curve with different settings for current.

I=I1 I=I2

The following illustration shows a standard characteristic curve with different settings for time.

I=I1 I=I2

2.1.3 First Instantaneous Tripping

The first instantaneous tripping is activated via the Tripping I> field. When activated with type
"Lim", the time of the characteristic-curve tripping is limited to the time of the first instantaneous
tripping. Further information on limiting the time of the characteristic-curve tripping is provided in
the chapter Composition of the Characteristic Curve.

34 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

PSS SINCAL can display currents for the first instantaneous tripping:

● In amperes
● Relative to the rated current
● Relative to the setting for characteristic-curve tripping

The current for the tripping is then:

● Current = setting
● Current = setting x rated current
● Current = setting x current for the characteristic-curve tripping

PSS SINCAL assigns a fixed tripping time for the first short circuit.

2.1.4 Second instantaneous Tripping

The second instantaneous tripping is activated via the Tripping I>> field. When activated with type
"Lim", the time of the characteristic-curve tripping is limited to the time of the second instantaneous
tripping. Further information on limiting the time of the characteristic-curve tripping is provided in
the chapter Composition of the Characteristic Curve.

Current and time values define the second instantaneous tripping.

PSS SINCAL can display currents for the second instantaneous tripping:

● In amperes
● Relative to the rated current
● Relative to the setting for characteristic-curve tripping
● Relative to the setting for the first instantaneous tripping

The current for the tripping is then:

● Current = setting
● Current = setting x rated current
● Current = setting x current for the characteristic-curve tripping
● Current = setting x current for the first instantaneous tripping

October 2019 35
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

PSS SINCAL assigns a fixed tripping time for the second short circuit.

2.1.5 Third Instantaneous Tripping

The third instantaneous tripping is activated via the Tripping I>>> field. When activated with type
"Lim", the time of the characteristic-curve tripping is limited to the time of the third instantaneous
tripping. Further information on limiting the time of the characteristic-curve tripping is provided in
the chapter Composition of the Characteristic Curve.

Current and time values define the third instantaneous tripping.

PSS SINCAL can display currents for the third instantaneous tripping:

● In amperes
● Relative to the rated current
● Relative to the setting for characteristic-curve tripping
● Relative to the setting for the first instantaneous tripping
● Relative to the setting for the second instantaneous tripping

The current for the tripping is then:

● Current = setting
● Current = setting x rated current
● Current = setting x current for the characteristic-curve tripping
● Current = setting x current for the first instantaneous tripping
● Current = setting x current for the second instantaneous tripping

36 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

PSS SINCAL assigns a fixed tripping time for the third short circuit.

2.1.6 Measurement Transformer Influence

The current through the protection device is influenced by the transmission ratio between the
measurement transformers:

● Primary and secondary rated current

If the current entering the protection device is not the same as the measurement transformer’s
secondary rated current, PSS SINCAL also has to consider the ratio between:

● The secondary rated current and the incoming current

Directional Element Settings

If there is a directional element, the preliminary settings for direction and range angle influence the
behavior of a protection device.

PSS SINCAL has the following settings for direction:

● Non-directional (current can have any angle)


● Forward (angle range towards the line)
● Reverse (angle range away from the line)

The settings for direction do not really depend on whether the current flows towards the line or
away from it. They only set the range of angles used. The current’s angle always refers to a
voltage. This can be either:

● Current voltage (voltage remaining after the short circuit)


● Voltage from the load flow (voltage stored at the protection device)

If the current voltage is zero (protection devices located directly at the fault location), PSS SINCAL
uses the voltage from the load flow.

October 2019 37
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Directional Elements, Intermediate Measurement Transformers, Delays and


Percentages

PSS SINCAL uses multipliers to consider these ratings for:

● Measurement transformers
● Characteristic-curve tripping
● First instantaneous tripping
● Second instantaneous tripping
● Third instantaneous tripping

2.1.7 Composition of the Characteristic Curve

Characteristic curves are made up of segments. PSS SINCAL considers only those segments that
are switched on.

Segments of Characteristic Curve, First, Second and Third Instantaneous Tripping

t t

I I
t t

I I

38 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

Characteristic Curve with Active Curve and Second Instantaneous Tripping

Characteristic Curve with Active Curve, First or Third Instantaneous Tripping

Characteristic Curve with Active First and Second Instantaneous Tripping

The time of the instantaneous tripping can be greater than the shortest time of the characteristic
curve, depending on the parameters of the tripping segments. The instantaneous tripping therefore
only overlays one part of the characteristic curve. Depending on the protection device
configuration, the time of the instantaneous tripping can be limited in this case. By activating the
instantaneous tripping with or without limitation, the following characteristic curves are produced.

October 2019 39
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Characteristic Curve with Characteristic-Curve Tripping and First Instantaneous Tripping


without Limitation Active

Characteristic Curve with Characteristic-Curve Tripping and First Instantaneous Tripping


with Limitation Active

2.1.8 Combination of Characteristics with a Recloser

The excitation can be combined individually for all parts of the disconnection and reconnection. A
high set current-independent tripping is normally used at the start with a short time to reconnection,
e.g. tripping with first and second instantaneous tripping:

40 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

A current-dependent tripping is normally used at the end, e.g. tripping with a tripping characteristic
curve:

The third instantaneous tripping is used for the stop tripping.

2.1.9 Switching Sequence with a Recloser

The complete switching sequence is divided into individual switching operations. A switching
operation starts with the excitation and ends with the reclosing. The time sequence is based on the
following.

Delay time Delay time


until Time to until
tripping reconnection tripping

t
Error
Switch Switch
occurrence
off time on time

Switching operation

October 2019 41
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

This switching operation is repeated depending on the configuration. Three switching operations
produce the following curve characteristic for the section.

t
Switching operation 1 Switching operation 2 Switching operation 3

All switching operations have the same time duration. After all switching sequences the final
disconnection is completed with the final tripping.

t
Section 1 Section 2 Last section Delay Switch
end off time

The stop tripping interrupts the switching sequence. Reconnection is not performed after the stop
tripping.

The manual interruption of the switching sequence can be recalculated by setting a switch time in
the protection device dialog box at Additional Data – Overcurrent Protection Settings. After the
switching time has elapsed (since the occurrence of the fault), the switching sequence is
interrupted. The connection is applied depending on the switching state.

2.1.10 Determining Intersection for Double Logarithmic Coordinates

Linear interpolation in a double logarithmic system of coordinates produces the wrong results.
Linear interpolation assumes a linear system of coordinates.

tlog

10

0.1
Ilog
1 10 100

42 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

Double logarithmic systems must therefore be converted to double linear systems for linear
interpolation. This is done using a base-ten logarithm. To prevent calculation errors, the results can
be multiplied by a constant factor.

𝐼𝑙𝑖𝑛 = 𝑓 × log 10(𝑙𝑙𝑜𝑔 )

𝑡𝑙𝑖𝑛 = 𝑓 × log 10(𝑡𝑙𝑜𝑔 )

tlin

-1
0 1 2 Ilin

In this double linear system, linear interpolation can be made to find the point of intersection. The
results of the linear interpolation are then converted back to the double logarithmic system.

𝑡𝑙𝑖𝑛
𝑡𝑙𝑜𝑔 = 10 𝑓

Direct linear interpolation in a double logarithmic system would produce an error of up to 10 %.

2.1.11 Determining the State of Protection Devices

A protection device can have the following states:

● Inactive
● Picked-up
● Tripped

Inactive

A protection device is inactive if the current passing through it is less than the smallest current of
its tripping characteristics or less than the smallest current of all the instantaneous tripping. The
current passing through the protection device does not cross the tripping characteristic curve.

Picked-Up

A protection device has been picked up if the current passing through it is equal to, or greater than,
the smallest current of its tripping characteristics or is equal to, or greater than, the current of all the
instantaneous tripping. The tripping time is where the current passing through the protection device
intersects with the tripping characteristic curve. This means that all picked-up protection devices
can be assigned tripping times.

October 2019 43
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Tripped Condition

In every simulation loop, PSS SINCAL trips the protection device that has the smallest tripping
time.

To allow for calculation errors, a safety time interval is added to the smallest tripping time.

Within this interval, all the protection devices trip. If the smallest tripping time is 150 ms and the
safety time interval is 0.5 ms, all the protection devices with tripping times less than 150.5 ms trip.

2.1.12 Graphic Display with Diagrams

PSS SINCAL provides two diagrams to display the results on the screen:

● Double logarithmic current-time diagram


● Linear R-X diagram

PSS SINCAL provides various diagram types so that settings and evaluations are easier for the
user to handle.

OC protection devices need an impedance area to be displayed as an R-X diagram. PSS SINCAL
normally uses a circle to represent this area. PSS SINCAL uses the calculated currents and
voltages at the protection device and determines the phase where the tripping current is flowing.

To determine the radius for the circle, the minimum impedance can be calculated from:

● The phase-ground loop


● Both phase-loops

Advantages of a Double Logarithmic Current-Time Diagram

● This proves the characteristic curves are unique.


● It is simple to compare these diagrams with the stair-shaped characteristic curves of distance-
protection devices.
● It shows the destruction limit.

44 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

The following illustration shows a double logarithmic current-time diagram.

Advantages of an R-X Diagram

● This is a simple way to compare the areas.


● The impedance to the fault location can be shown as a cursor.
● It enables a comparison with protection devices for distance protection.

The following illustration shows a R-X diagram.

October 2019 45
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

2.1.13 Graphic Display with Legends

This function lets you create your own legends for ranges and input data for individual OC
protection devices. Simply switch Insert Legend ON in the protection device’s pop-up menu.

Use Select function to insert new legends or update existing ones.

Click Insert Legend to select which legends should be added:

● Input data and range separately


● Input data and range
● Input data
● Range

You can insert up to two legends per protection device. They can be defined with the options for
Range and Input Data in the Insert Legend section.

Switch Create legend containers ON to group legends generated for OC protection devices in a
container.

Update existing Legends assigns all existing legends the settings you have entered in Options.

Use Options to define the legend’s layout (to either the right or the left of the protection device) as
well as the distances from the protection device to the legends (for range and input data).

When Use only selected protection devices is switched ON, PSS SINCAL uses all selected
settings in the dialog box only for previously selected protection devices. If this is not switched ON,
PSS SINCAL considers all the protection devices in the current view.

2.1.14 Importing and Exporting Protection Device Settings

PSS SINCAL can import or export OC protection device settings.

Importing Protection Device Settings

This function imports OC protection device settings from a XML file.

46 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

Click Import and Export – Import Settings in the pop-up menu of the protection device to activate
this function.

This opens the Import Protection Device Settings dialog box. In this dialog box the DIGSI XML
file can be selected for import.

When the file is selected, this dialog box automatically determines what the file format is. A
differentiation is made between files with PSS SINCAL settings and files with DIGSI protection
devices.

DIGSI has an import/export interface that lets you use the DIGSI XML file to exchange protection
device settings. This file can read in protection device settings from DIGSI for use in PSS SINCAL.

When this DIGSI protection device file is selected, the following dialog page can be used to make
additional settings.

The Import Options section specifies the group of settings from DIGSI you want to import:

● First setting:
The first setting group from the DIGSI XML file is used automatically.
● Setting group name:
This option is used to enter the name for the setting group you want to import.

When Use setting address for identification is switched ON, PSS SINCAL attempts to use the
address of the setting to assign the settings for this type of protection device. When this option is
switched OFF, PSS SINCAL uses the name of the setting to assign them.

October 2019 47
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Exporting Protection Device Settings

This function exports OC protection device settings to a XML file.

Click Import and Export – Export Settings in the pop-up menu of the protection device to switch
this function ON.

This opens the Export Protection Device Settings dialog box. In this dialog box the XML file can
be defined for export.

Click the Next > button to open the next dialog box.

Export Options selects the export scope.

● Selected protection devices


● All protection devices

2.1.15 Importing Protection Device Setting from PDMS

This function imports OC protection device settings from a PSS PDMS database. PSS PDMS is a
universal program for the central management of protection devices and their settings.

Click Import and Export – Import Settings from PDMS in the pop-up menu of the protection
device to switch this function ON.

48 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

In the Import Files section, you can select the PSS PDMS protection device database or a
mapping file to be imported. Mapping files contain information to assure there is a valid exchange
of selection values between different systems. In PSS SINCAL, for example, the selection value
"On" has the number "1". In PSS SINCAL, this would be "23". This mapping file assures that, when
you import the value "23", this will be converted to "1" and that this is a valid selection value. For a
precise description of the mapping file, see the chapter on Mapping File PSS SINCAL –
PSS PDMS in the System Manual.

Click the Next > button to open the next dialog box.

General defines whether all the protection devices or only the selected protection devices are used
for the import.

PDMS Groups selects which group and state is imported. For a precise description of the
different states, see the chapter on Set State in the System Manual PDMS.

Click Finish to import according to the settings and create a connection between the protection
device and PSS PDMS. This is done with the respective MRID of the protection device.

Importing will only process settings from PSS PDMS if the Key field has a setting function for
coupling with PSS PDMS. For the list of available keys, see the chapter on Protection Setting in the
System Manual PDMS.

Importing prepares detailed messages in the Message window.

October 2019 49
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

2.2 Types of OC Protection Devices


PSS SINCAL uses segmented tripping characteristics to simulate the functions of OC protection
devices. The scope and the functions of these individual segments are stored in a special database
for protection device types.

This lets you recreate different OC protection device types in PSS SINCAL without any problems.
PSS SINCAL has a database for OC protection device types with approximately 2500 types. If you
cannot find the OC protection device type you need in this global database, it can also be created
and configured in a local database.

OC protection device types are divided into the following types:

● Circuit breakers with measurement transformers


● Low-voltage circuit breakers
● Fuses
● Bi-metallic circuit breakers
● Contactors
● Trip fuses

2.2.1 Creating a New OC Protection Device Type

File – Administration – New Protection Database in the menu creates an empty protection
database that is not assigned to any network for the present (see the section on New Protection
Database in the chapter on Basic Functions). In the Options dialog box you can assign the
database.

2.2.2 Editing OC Protection Device Types

Data – Standard Types – Overcurrent Time Protection opens the screen form for working on
OC protection device types, if you have switched ON the calculation method for protection
coordination.

50 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

The following illustration shows a screen form for editing OC protection device type.

The screen form for editing OC protection device types has two sections:

● Browser for type selection


● Data screen area

The browser for type selection has the type selected for editing. PSS SINCAL displays all
settings for this type in the data screen area, where they can be modified. The Group by
manufacturer item in the pop-up menu makes it possible to change the hierarchy. The devices are
also grouped by manufacturer. This has the advantage that the device types of well-known
manufacturers can be found more easily.

Note: The data for global types cannot be modified since this information is a standard part of
PSS SINCAL and is maintained by Siemens. But data for local types can be modified, new types
can be added and existing types can be deleted. The copy function simplifies adding new types.

Toolbar

Use the toolbar to switch important functions of the browser ON to process the types.

Define filter

Filter field

Create new OC protection device type

Copy selected OC protection device type

Insert copied OC protection device type

October 2019 51
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Delete selected OC protection device type

Clicking Define filter defines filters for limiting protection device types.

Entering a filter text in the filter field immediately reduces the amount displayed at the browser
below.

Clicking Create new OC protection device type creates a new OC protection device type. Note
that new OC protection device types can only be created in the local protection device type
database.

Clicking Copy selected OC protection device type prepares the OC protection device type you
have selected in the browser on the clipboard so it can be inserted in the local protection device
type database.

OC protection device types copied to the clipboard with the Copy function can be inserted with
Insert copied OC protection device type to the current position in the browser (but only in the
local protection device type database).

Clicking Delete selected OC protection device type deletes the OC protection device type
selected in the browser. Only local protection device types can be deleted.

Pop-Up Menu

Click the right mouse button on an OC protection device type in the browser to display the pop-up
menu.

This pop-up menu lets you edit the OC protection device type directly. The functions Expand and
Collapse open or close the tree.

Import Protection Device Settings in the menu imports user-defined protection devices from an
ASCII file to a PSS SINCAL 16.0 protection device database. For a detailed description, see the
chapter on Importing OC Protection Device Characteristics in the System Manual.

52 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

2.2.3 Creating and Configuring OC Protection Device Types

To create a new OC protection device type, first select the form for new type in the browser of the
local database. Then select New in the pop-up menu.

Then configure the new OC protection device type in the data screen area.

To edit an existing OC protection device type, simply select this in the browser and change its
configuration accordingly in the data screen area.

October 2019 53
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

2.2.4 Copying OC Protection Device Types

When OC protection device types are very similar, it is easier just to copy them. Select the type you
want to copy in the screen form and open the pop-up menu.

Select Copy in the menu and insert the OC protection device type in the local database. You need
to select the corresponding form (in this case a circuit breaker) in the browser of the local database
and open the pop-up menu.

Select Paste to copy the OC protection device type to the local database.

Before you can configure the new OC protection device type, you need to select it in the browser of
the local database.

2.2.5 Configuring OC Protection Device Types

OC protection device types are configured in different screen forms according to the functionality of
the OC protection device.

54 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

Configuring General Data

You need to select the collective entry in the browser of the local database to configure the general
data.

This defines the Name of the OC protection device type. PSS SINCAL displays this later within the
legend for the network diagram. The Manufacturer and User Name are supplementary
information, and as such are not needed later.

Angle Determining sets the method used to determine the impedance angle for the direction
decision.

Rated Current (Phase) and Rated Current (Ground) are just supplementary information.

Configuring a Tripping Type

Basic Data

This defines the behavior of the OC protection device for the particular segment.

October 2019 55
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

The following illustration shows a screen form for configuring the basic data of a tripping type.

Normally tripping types are made up of the type of OC protection device and the protection
behavior. The following abbreviations for individual protection behavior according to IEC 255-3 can
be found in the global protection database:

Abbrev. Protection behavior


DEF Definite-time characteristic
NOR Normal inverse characteristics
VER Very inverse characteristics
EXT Extremely inverse characteristics
LTE Long time inverse characteristics
OVO Overload characteristics
OVM Overload memory characteristics
O%% Overload characteristics with pre-load in %,
where %% = 29, 40, 60, 80, 99 (= 100 %)
RES Residual characteristics
STE Short time inverse characteristics

The following abbreviations for the individual protection behavior according to ANSI /IEEE can be
found in the global protection database:

Abbrev. Protection behavior


DEV Definite time characteristics
INV Inverse (AMZ inv) characteristics
SIV Short inverse (AMZ inv) characteristics
LIV Long inverse (AMZ inv) characteristics

56 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

MIV Massive inverse (AMZ inv) characteristics


VIV Strong/Very inverse (AMZ inv) characteristics
EIV Extremely inverse (AMZ inv) characteristics
DIV Equal/definite inverse (AMZ inv) characteristics
I2T Quadratic inverse (AMZ inv) characteristics
MOD Moderately inverse (AMZ inv) characteristics

The following abbreviations for bi-metallic devices and circuit breakers can be found in the global
protection database:

Abbrev. Protection behavior


K or C Cold characteristics
W Warm characteristics

The following names for protection devices, whose settings depend on the secondary current
transformer, can be found in the global protection database:

Abbrev. Protection behavior


…_1 1 A current transformer (e.g.. 7SJ63_1.NOR)
…_5 5 A current transformer (e.g.. 7SJ63_5.NOR)
…_1A 1 ampere AC rated current with a transformer for phase and ground
…_5A 5 ampere AC rated current with a transformer for phase and ground
…_200mA 200 mA AC rated current (mainly only ground transformer)
…_50mA 50 mA AC rated current (mainly only ground transformer)
…_1A_G 1 ampere AC rated current with a separate transformer for phase and ground
…_5A_G 5 ampere AC rated current with a separate transformer for phase and ground
…_1A_PP 1 ampere AC rated current phase-phase protection
…_5A_PP 5 ampere AC rated current phase-phase protection

The following names analogous to the version number in the product catalog (e.g. 3WN1.4,
3WN6.D) for the low voltage circuit breaker 3WN can be found in the global protection database.

The following names for fuses can be found in the global protection database:

Abbrev. Protection behavior


VDE_100 100 A low voltage fuses according to VDE (I-t characteristics with average
operating time behavior)
VDEu_... Low voltage fuses according to VDE (I-t characteristics with the fastest operating
time behavior)
VDEo_... Low voltage fuses according to VDE (I-t characteristics with the slowest operating
time behavior)
VDE- 500 A high voltage fuses according to VDE
H_500
3N.._... Siemens low voltage fuses

October 2019 57
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

3G.._ ... Siemens high voltage fuses

Ip Section for the Segment for Characteristic-Curve Tripping

Phase Tripping and Ground Tripping determine whether the tripping type has a segment with
current/time characteristic-curve tripping for phase currents or ground currents. The following
values are available:

● None:
No characteristic-curve tripping
● In:
Characteristic-curve tripping with current related to rated transformer current
● A:
Characteristic-curve tripping with current in amperes

Phase I2t Limiting and Ground I2t Limiting determine whether characteristic-curve tripping has
an I2t current limit. The following values are available:

● None:
No I2t current limit
● In:
I2t current limit with current related to rated transformer current
● A:
I2t current limit with current in amperes

I> Section for Segment with First Instantaneous Tripping

Phase Tripping and Ground Tripping determine whether the current tripping type has a first
instantaneous tripping for phase currents or ground currents. The following values are available:

● None:
No first instantaneous tripping
● In:
First instantaneous tripping with current related to rated transformer current
● A:
First instantaneous tripping with current in amperes
● Ip:
First instantaneous tripping with current related to the current for characteristic-curve tripping

Phase I2t Limiting and Ground I2t Limiting determine whether the first instantaneous tripping has
an I2t current limit. The following values are available:

● None:
No I2t current limit
● In:
I2t current limit with current related to rated transformer current
● A:
I2t current limit with current in amperes

58 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

● Ip:
I2t current limit with current related to the current for characteristic-curve tripping

I>> Section for Segment with Second Instantaneous Tripping

Phase Tripping and Ground Tripping determine whether the current tripping type has a second
instantaneous tripping for phase currents or ground currents. The following values are available:

● None:
No second instantaneous tripping
● In:
Second instantaneous tripping with current related to rated transformer current
● A:
Second instantaneous tripping with current in amperes
● Ip:
Second instantaneous tripping with current related to the current of the characteristic-curve
tripping
● I>:
Second instantaneous tripping with current related to the current for first instantaneous tripping

Phase I2t Limiting and Ground I2t Limiting determine whether the second instantaneous tripping
has an I2t current limit. The following values are available:

● None:
No I2t current limit
● In:
I2t current limit with current related to rated transformer current
● A:
I2t current limit with current in amperes
● Ip:
I2t current limit with current related to the current for characteristic-curve tripping
● I>:
I2t current limit with current related to the current for first instantaneous tripping

I>>> Section for Segment with Third Instantaneous Tripping

Phase Tripping and Ground Tripping determine whether the current tripping type has a third
instantaneous tripping for phase currents or ground currents. The following values are available:

● None:
No third instantaneous tripping
● In:
Third instantaneous tripping with current related to rated transformer current
● A:
Third instantaneous tripping with current in amperes
● Ip:
Third instantaneous tripping with current related to the current for characteristic-curve tripping
● I>:
Third instantaneous tripping with current related to the current for first instantaneous tripping

October 2019 59
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

● I>>:
Third instantaneous tripping with current related to the current for second instantaneous
tripping

Phase I2t Limiting and Ground I2t Limiting determine whether the third instantaneous tripping
has an I2t current limit. The following values are available:

● None:
No I2t current limit
● In:
I2t current limit with current related to rated transformer current
● A:
I2t current limit with current in amperes
● Ip:
I2t current limit with current related to the current for characteristic-curve tripping
● I>:
I2t current limit with current related to the current for first instantaneous tripping
● I>>:
I2t current limit with current related to the current for second instantaneous tripping

Section for Tripping Characteristics

If there is characteristic-curve tripping, the appropriate tripping characteristics need to be entered.


Enter characteristic-curve values as described in the chapter on Screen Form for Characteristics
Input.

For the tripping characteristics, select I/t Curve in the Function field.

60 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

For the Type, you normally enter IT1 or IT2. If the type contains a 1, PSS SINCAL uses these
characteristics to determine the intersecting point that has the pickup current. If the type contains a
2, PSS SINCAL displays these characteristics in the current/time diagrams of Diagram View.
Characteristic-curve tripping requires at the very least a characteristic curve for tripping with an
entry for type containing a 1.

The additional name in the basic data for the characteristic curve is usually the same as the
protection behavior. There is, however, no explicit entry for this additional name.

The following screen form shows a fuse with an entry for two tripping characteristics.

OC protection device types with K (Cold) and W (Warm) tripping have an unusual feature when
this abbreviation has also been entered in the basic data of the characteristics as an additional
name. In this case, PSS SINCAL displays both characteristic curves in the current/time diagrams of
Diagram View.

October 2019 61
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Tripping Function

If characteristic curve tripping exists, enter the appropriate function for calculating tripping
characteristics. Enter the parameters for the respective function as described in the chapter on
Screen Form for Characteristics Input.

For the tripping characteristics, select a value for a function, e.g. Function 1, in the Function field.

Only one entry for tripping characteristics is allowed. Normally the protection behavior can be
entered under Type and Name. PSS SINCAL does not, however, have specific entries for types or
names.

62 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

The following screen form shows a circuit breaker with transformer and normal inverse tripping.

Since the tripping characteristics calculated with this function are reference characteristics, you had
to select In (= current entry for rated transformer current) in the Ip column.

You need to enter the appropriate settings for the function you have selected.

To calculate tripping characteristics, this function proceeds from the initial value I/I p to the end value
I/Ip. This result is the base ft, which produces the tripping time t in seconds, depending on the type
of value range.

Value Range with Type: Tp and Tep

The time setting value for the characteristic tripping t p is converted to seconds tp sec. The tripping
time in seconds is then produced through the following multiplication.

𝑡 = 𝑡𝑝 𝑠𝑒𝑐 × 𝑓𝑡

October 2019 63
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Value Range with Type: absTp and absTep

The time setting value for the characteristic tripping tp is not used. The result value of the function is
the tripping time in seconds.

𝑡 = 𝑓𝑡

Value Range with Type: setTp and setTep

The time setting value for the characteristic tripping t p is used without any conversion of units. The
tripping time in seconds is then produced through the following multiplication.

𝑡 = 𝑡𝑝 × 𝑓𝑡

The tripping time can be limited by a time range. If the time is outside of the range, the particular
range limit (tmin or tmax) is used as the tripping time.

Function 1

𝑃1
𝑓𝑡 = 𝑃2
𝐼
( ) − 𝑃3
𝐼𝑝

Type Parameter
P1 Parameter P1
P2 Parameter P2
P3 Parameter P3
IIp_min Minimum value I/Ip
IIp_max Maximum value I/Ip
tmin Minimum time
tmax Maximum time

Function 2

𝐼 𝑃2 𝑃3 𝑃5
( ) −( )
𝐼𝑝 𝑃4
𝑓𝑡 = 𝑃1 × 𝐼𝑛
𝐼 𝑃6
( ) − 𝑃7𝑃8
𝐼
[ 𝑝 ]

Type Parameter
P1 Parameter P1 (60.0 to convert to seconds)
P2 Parameter P2
P3 Parameter P3 (initial load)
P4 Parameter P4
P5 Parameter P5

64 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

P6 Parameter P6
P7 Parameter P7
P8 Parameter P8
IIp_min Minimum value I/Ip
IIp_max Maximum value I/Ip

Function 3

𝑃1
𝑓𝑡 = 𝑃2 + 𝑃4
𝐼
( ) − 𝑃3
𝐼𝑝

Type Parameter
P1 Parameter P1
P2 Parameter P2
P3 Parameter P3
P4 Parameter P4
IIp_min Minimum value I/Ip
IIp_max Maximum value I/Ip

IEC Inverse (Curve C1)

0.14
𝑓𝑡 = 0.02
𝐼
( ) − 1.0
𝐼𝑝

IEC Very Inverse (Curve C2)

13.5
𝑓𝑡 =
𝐼
( ) − 1.0
𝐼𝑝

IEC Extremely Inverse (Curve C3)

80.0
𝑓𝑡 =
𝐼 2
( ) − 1.0
𝐼𝑝

IEC Long Time Inverse (Curve C4)

120
𝑓𝑡 =
𝐼
( ) − 1.0
𝐼𝑝

October 2019 65
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

IEC Short Time Inverse (Curve C5)

0.05
𝑓𝑡 = 0.04
𝐼
( ) − 1.0
𝐼𝑝

ANSI Moderately Inverse (Curve U1)

0.0104
𝑓𝑡 = + 0.0256
𝐼 0.02
( ) − 1.0
𝐼𝑝

ANSI Inverse (Curve U2)

5.95
𝑓𝑡 = + 0.18
𝐼 2
( ) − 1.0
𝐼𝑝

ANSI Very Inverse (Curve U3)

3.88
𝑓𝑡 = + 0.0963
𝐼 2
( ) − 1.0
𝐼𝑝

ANSI Extremely Inverse (Curve U4)

5.67
𝑓𝑡 = + 0.0352
𝐼 2
( ) − 1.0
𝐼𝑝

ANSI Short Time Inverse (Curve U5)

0.00342
𝑓𝑡 = + 0.00262
𝐼 0.02
( ) − 1.0
𝐼𝑝

Formula

The formula for the tripping characteristics can be entered here. Only the entry of the minimum
and/or maximum value for I/Ip is required as parameters. If no entry is made, PSS SINCAL uses 1.1
as the minimum value and 20.0 as the maximum value.

The calculated time is measured in seconds. If the unit "min" or "cyc" are entered in the setting
value data, the calculated time is automatically transformed from minutes or cycles (via the
frequency) to seconds.

66 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

The following predefined variables are provided in the formulas.

Variable name Variable value Unit


I_Ip or IIp Ratio of current to rated current 1
T_s Setting value tripping time s
T_cyc Setting value tripping time cyc
1 cyc = 1/frequency
Frq Frequency Hz

Example of overload characteristics with a pre-load current of 20 %:

ln(( IIp^2 – 0.2^2) / (IIp^2 – 1))

𝐼 2
( ) − 0.22
𝐼𝑝
𝑓𝑡 = 𝑙𝑛
𝐼 2
( ) −1
[ 𝐼𝑝 ]

Type Parameter
IIp_min 1.001
IIp_max 10.000

Example of current-dependent overcurrent tripping characteristics:

0.14/(IIp^0.02 – 1.0 )

0.14
𝑓𝑡 =
𝐼 0.02
( ) −1
𝐼𝑝

Type Parameter
IIp_min 1.050

The mathematical functions are listed in the System Manual, chapter Technical Reference, section
Converting Signals with Formulas.

Settings

This defines the value ranges for entries for current and time of OC protection devices for the
particular protection function.

October 2019 67
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Enter value ranges for the OC protection device type as described in the chapter on Screen Form
for Characteristics Input.

This data screen form describes a setting at the OC protection device.

Name is the abbreviation for the setting in the protection device description. The Unit of the setting
is also found in the protection device description. State is used to document a setting or switch this
ON for input in the OC protection device screen form.

Setting Address contains the setting at the protection device.

68 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

Type defines the connection between setting according to description and how it is used in
PSS SINCAL. PSS SINCAL has the following values for the configuration:

Type Function
WSEK rated transformer current phase
ESEK rated transformer current ground
SWp Characteristic-curve tripping phase switchable
SW> First instantaneous tripping phase switchable
SW>> Second instantaneous tripping phase switchable
SW>>> Third instantaneous tripping phase switchable
SWep Characteristic-curve tripping ground switchable
SWe> First instantaneous tripping ground switchable
SWe>> Second instantaneous tripping ground switchable
SWe>>> Third instantaneous tripping ground switchable
Ip Current characteristic-curve tripping phase
I> Current first instantaneous tripping phase
I>> Current second instantaneous tripping phase
I>>> Current third instantaneous tripping phase
Iep Current characteristic-curve tripping ground
Ie> Current first instantaneous tripping ground
Ie>> Current second instantaneous tripping ground
Ie>>> Current third instantaneous tripping ground
F_Ip Factor for current characteristic-curve tripping phase
F_I> Factor for current first instantaneous tripping phase
F_I>> Factor for current second instantaneous tripping phase
F_I>>> Factor for current third instantaneous tripping phase
F_Iep Factor for current characteristic-curve tripping ground
F_Ie> Factor for current first instantaneous tripping ground
F_Ie>> Factor for current second instantaneous tripping ground
F_Ie>>> Factor for current third instantaneous tripping ground
Tp Reference time characteristic-curve-tripping phase (with unit conversion)
absTp Absolute time characteristic-curve-tripping phase
setTp Reference time characteristic-curve-tripping phase (without unit conversion)
T> Time first instantaneous tripping phase
T>> Time second instantaneous tripping phase
T>>> Time third instantaneous tripping phase
Add_Tp Additional time characteristic-curve-tripping phase
Add_T> Additional time first instantaneous tripping phase
Add_T>> Additional time second instantaneous tripping phase
Add_T>>> Additional time third instantaneous tripping phase
Tep Reference time characteristic-curve-tripping ground (with unit conversion)

October 2019 69
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

absTep Absolute time characteristic-curve-tripping ground


setTep Reference time characteristic-curve-tripping ground (without unit conversion)
Te> Time first instantaneous tripping ground
Te>> Time second instantaneous tripping ground
Te>>> Time third instantaneous tripping ground
Add_Tep Additional time characteristic-curve-tripping ground
Add_Te> Additional time first instantaneous tripping ground
Add_Te>> Additional time second instantaneous tripping ground
Add_Te>>> Additional time third instantaneous tripping ground
F_Tp Factor for time characteristic-curve tripping phase
F_T> Factor for time first instantaneous tripping phase
F_T>> Factor for time second instantaneous tripping phase
F_T>>> Factor for time third instantaneous tripping phase
F_Tep Factor for time characteristic-curve tripping ground
F_Te> Factor for time first instantaneous tripping ground
F_Te>> Factor for time second instantaneous tripping ground
F_Te>>> Factor for time third instantaneous tripping ground
I2Ip Current I2t limit characteristic-curve tripping phase
I2I> Current I2t limit first instantaneous tripping phase
I2I>> Current I2t limit second instantaneous tripping phase
I2I>>> Current I2t limit third instantaneous tripping phase
I2Iep Current I2t limit characteristic-curve tripping ground
I2Ie> Current I2t limit first instantaneous tripping ground
I2Ie>> Current I2t limit second instantaneous tripping ground
I2Ie>>> Current I2t limit third instantaneous tripping ground
I2Tp Time I2t limit characteristic-curve tripping phase
I2T> Time I2t limit first instantaneous tripping phase
I2T>> Time I2t limit second instantaneous tripping phase
I2T>>> Time I2t limit third instantaneous tripping phase
I2Tep Time I2t limit characteristic-curve tripping ground
I2Te> Time I2t limit first instantaneous tripping ground
I2Te>> Time I2t limit second instantaneous tripping ground
I2Te>>> Time I2t limit third instantaneous tripping ground
Tmin Minimum time for characteristic-curve-tripping

All additional types are only for documentation and do not influence how the OC protection device
type is configured.

70 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

2.2.6 Assigning the OC Protection Device Type

Once a new OC protection device has been created, PSS SINCAL displays a screen form where
you can assign the OC protection device type. Before you can do this, you have to select OC
Settings in the browser for the OC protection device. Select the filter button to preselect the OC
protection device types.

PSS SINCAL displays the OC protection device types you have selected as a list.

October 2019 71
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

When you select a type, PSS SINCAL assigns this to the OC protection device for phase and
ground tripping. If you want to use another type for ground tripping, assign this at ground. You can
only select between the individual tripping types of OC protection devices.

2.2.7 Special Protection Device Types

For the general protection device types, the data is given in amperes. These general protection
types can also be used for specifying the data relative to the rated current. For this the factor for
the primary rated current of the current transformers must be entered as 1 or 5, depending on the
rated current of the protection device.

The following are general protection device types with tripping characteristics to VDE requirements:

Type Function
IEC_1A Instantaneous/Definite Time Phase Ip
Inverse Time Phase I>
Inverse Time Phase I>>
Inverse Time Phase I>>>
Instantaneous/Definite Time Ground Iep
Inverse Time Ground Ie>
Inverse Time Ground Ie>>
Inverse Time Ground Ie>>>
IEC_5A Instantaneous/Definite Time Phase Ip
Inverse Time Phase I>
Inverse Time Phase I>>
Inverse Time Phase I>>>
Instantaneous/Definite Time Ground Iep
Inverse Time Ground Ie>
Inverse Time Ground Ie>>
Inverse Time Ground Ie>>>

The following are general protection device types in accordance with ANSI regulations:

Type Function
ANSI_1A Instantaneous/Definite Time Phase 51P
Inverse Time Phase 50PM
Inverse Time Phase 50PH
Inverse Time Phase 50POH
Instantaneous/Definite Time Ground 51N
Inverse Time Ground 50GM
Inverse Time Ground 50 GH
Inverse Time Ground 50GOH
ANSI_5A Instantaneous/Definite Time Phase 51P

72 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

Inverse Time Phase 50PM


Inverse Time Phase 50PH
Inverse Time Phase 50POH
Instantaneous/Definite Time Ground 51N
Inverse Time Ground 50GM
Inverse Time Ground 50 GH
Inverse Time Ground 50GOH

2.3 Distance-Protection Devices


Impedance areas describe distance protection devices. Distance-protection devices trip when the
impedance registered at the protection device is within a given impedance area.

PSS SINCAL recognizes various kinds of impedance areas, from simple conductance circles to
freely definable impedance areas, so that all distance protection devices in use can be simulated.

2.3.1 Shapes of Impedance Areas

PSS SINCAL represents real protection devices with the following types of tripping areas:

● Basic Areas:
Rectangular or circle
● SIEMENS Areas
● Freely Definable Areas

Depending on the shape of the area, PSS SINCAL stipulates the following:

Basic Areas

This is the simplest shape. To define a rectangular area, enter the following:

● Active resistance
● Reactive reactance
● Quadrant input:
I (first quadrant)
A (all quadrants)

Depending on the type of protection device, this area can be either a rectangle or a circle.

October 2019 73
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

The following illustration shows a rectangular impedance area.

Type: I Type: A

X X

R, X R, X

R R

-R, -X

SIEMENS Areas

The impedance quadrilateral has the typical SIEMENS shape for distance-protection devices. To
define the area, enter the following:

● X+A (reactive reactance)


● X-A (reactive reactance)
● RA1 (active resistance)
● RA2 (active resistance)
●  (angle)

Impedance quadrilateral areas always have the following shape:

X
X+A

-RA2 RA2
-RA1 RA1 R

X-A

To define the impedance quadrilateral 7ST6, enter the following:

● X (reactive reactance)
● R (active resistance)
● α (angle)

74 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

● β (angle)
● γ (angle)

Impedance quadrilateral 7ST6 areas always have the following shape:

α
β

R
γ

To define the combined tripping area, enter the following:

● Z (apparent resistance)
● R (active resistance)
● α (angle)
● β (angle)
● γ (angle)

Combined tripping areas always have the following shape:

α
β

R
γ

Freely Definable Areas

Here the user can simulate any kind of area. Ten straight lines and four circles define an area. The
straight lines, the circles and the input sequence can be defined freely.

The straight lines pass through a point that has been defined and are at an angle to the positive R
axis. Straight lines are defined by the following:

● R (active resistance)
● X (reactive reactance)
●  (angle)

October 2019 75
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Three points define circles: starting, arc and end points. Circles always begin at a starting point, go
through the arc and end points and then back to the starting point. The procedure is important
since it creates the limiting line.

Circles can be lengthened or shortened in R and X directions or rotated at an angle to the positive
R axis.

Circles are defined by

● Ra (active resistance at the starting point)


● Xa (reactive reactance at the starting point)
● Rb (active resistance at the arc point)
● Xb (reactive reactance at the arc point)
● Re (active resistance at the end point)
● Xe (reactive reactance at the end point)
● fR (factor for distortion in direction R)
● fX (factor for distortion in direction X)
●  (angle for rotation)
X

G1

K1

G2

If there are problems setting the limiting line, either:

● Change the beginning and end point


● Change the element sequence

2.3.2 Pickup Distance Protection Devices

Modern protection devices can have various kinds of pickup conditions:

● Current Pickup
● Underimpedance Pickup
● Undervoltage Pickup
● Impedance Pickup – Area Pickup

Each of these conditions also has an end time. If the device has not tripped before this time, then it
trips automatically.

76 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

For a detailed description of the pickup input data, see the section on Pickup in the chapter on
Protection Coordination in the Input Data Manual.

Current Pickup

This condition is fulfilled when values drop below a minimum current. Simply going below this
current fulfills the condition.

PSS SINCAL supports three different types of current pickup:

● Directional current pickup (without tripping):


This type of pickup considers the setting for the direction (forwards, backwards). There is no
final time, so the protection device does not necessarily trip.
● Directional current pickup:
This type of pickup considers the setting for the direction (forwards, backwards).
● Non-directional current pickup

Underimpedance Pickup

Several conditions have to be fulfilled before there is underimpedance pickup.

● Exceeding the limits of minimum current I> and


● Being below the voltages V> until V>> at a current of between I> and I>>
● Exceeding the current I>>

V
Inactive

V>>
V>
Energized

I
I> I>>

Undervoltage Pickup

The condition is fulfilled, when the voltage is below the defined minimum voltage V< and the
current is above the defined value I>.

Inactive Inactive

V<
Inactive Energized

I
I>

October 2019 77
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Impedance Pickup – Area Pickup

With impedance pickup, the impedance registered by the protection device must be within a
prescribed impedance area to meet the pickup condition. A SIEMENS area describes this type of
pickup.

The pickup area can be assigned two different final times (directional and non-directional).

2.3.3 Tripping with Distance Protection Devices

In all kinds of tripping, the registered impedance of the protection device must be within a
prescribed impedance area.

Individual protection devices are assigned all kinds of areas with times for tripping.

To determine tripping behavior, PSS SINCAL sorts all areas of a protection device according to
tripping times (registered impedance within the area).

X
t

t3 R

t2 R

t1 R

All areas are sorted by times (in ascending order), independent of their shape. This assures that
the area that can trip fastest is always checked first and can trip.

Teleprotection is also considered with the time of the first zone for the examination of the excitation
if the following conditions are fulfilled:

● The teleprotection must be set for forward protection.


● Due to the setting values for teleprotection it must be possible to define an impedance area.
● A corresponding distance protection device must be found via a separate network tracing for
which the two conditions above are also fulfilled.

The signal transmissions required for teleprotection are then generated internally and considered.

This results in a tripping behavior as described in chapter Example of Blocked Tripping.

2.3.4 Measurement Transformer Influence

Current and voltage transformers supply individual distance-protection devices with data.

78 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

All protection devices measure impedance either on:

● The primary side


● The secondary side

Measurement – Primary Side

Currents and voltages are not converted.

Measurement – Secondary Side

All currents are assigned this transmission ratio:

● Rated current primary/rated current secondary times


● Factor for intermediate-current transformers

All voltages are assigned this transmission ratio:

● Rated voltage primary/rated voltage secondary times


● Factor for intermediate-voltage transformers

Considering Directional Elements

The angle of the impedance registered for directional elements needs to be checked before
checking whether the registered impedance is inside an area.

Depending on the direction, the angle must be within its own angle range.

PSS SINCAL accepts the following settings for the direction:

● Non-directional (angle range the same)


● Forward (angle range towards the line)
● Reverse (angle range back from the line)

The setting for the direction determines in which angle range the impedance must be picked up.

The impedance angle always refers to a voltage. This voltage comprises the following parts:

Vact … Current voltage (remaining voltage from short circuit)


Vlf … Voltage from load flow (voltage stored at the protection device)
Vf … Voltage outside the fault (all phase voltage not affecting by the fault) rotated 90 °

A percentage can be set for all the parts. The voltage determining the angle, however, is always
the sum of all parts evaluated and comes, for example, from

100 % 𝑉𝑎𝑐𝑡 + 0 % 𝑉𝑙𝑓 + 0 % 𝑉𝑓

or

100 % 𝑉𝑎𝑐𝑡 + 20 % 𝑉𝑙𝑓 + 20 % 𝑉𝑓

The sum of the percentages does not have to be 100 %!

October 2019 79
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

2.3.5 Impedance Loops

The possible impedance loops

● Phase 1 – ground
● Phase 2 – ground
● Phase 3 – ground
● Phase 1 – phase 2
● Phase 2 – phase 3
● Phase 3 – phase 1

are handled according to the setting.

In SIEMENS or freely defined impedance areas, all impedance loops to be checked must be
defined. PSS SINCAL only considers impedances from active impedance loops.

All protection devices can determine the impedance of the impedance loops in the conventional
way. On the following devices for measuring types impedance polygon, MHO circle and MHO circle
polarized, the impedance can also be calculated according to the reactance method:

● Common
● 7SA84
● 7SA86
● 7SA87

Selection of Currents and Voltages

The protection devices register the current in the opposite direction as specified under Agreements
for Results. The negative current shown with the results is therefore used to determine the
impedance loops.

The currents and voltages of the transformers can be used as follows for determining the loop
impedances.

"Normal" option Voltage Current


Loop impedance L1-L2 V1-V2 I1-I2
Loop impedance L2-L3 V2-V3 I2-I3
Loop impedance L3-L1 V3-V1 I3-I1
Loop impedance L1-ground V1 I1, Ie
Loop impedance L2-ground V2 I2, Ie
Loop impedance L3-ground V3 I3, Ie

"Modify U" option Voltage Current


Loop impedance L1-L2 ((V2-V3) – (V3-V1)) * (0.0 + j1.0) I1-I2
Loop impedance L2-L3 ((V3-V1) – (V1-V2)) * (0.0 + j1.0) I2-I3
Loop impedance L3-L1 ((V1-V2) – (V2–V3)) * (0.0 + j1.0) I3-I1
Loop impedance L1-ground (V2-V3) * (0.0 + j1.0) I1, Ie
Loop impedance L2-ground (V3-V1) * (0.0 + j1.0) I2, Ie

80 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

Loop impedance L3-ground (V1-V2) * (0.0 + j1.0) I3, Ie

"Modify U and I" option Voltage Current


Loop impedance L1-L2 ((V2-V3) – (V3-V1)) * (0.0 + j1.0) I1-I2
Loop impedance L2-L3 ((V3-V1) – (V1-V2)) * (0.0 + j1.0) I2-I3
Loop impedance L3-L1 ((V1-V2) – (V2–V3)) * (0.0 + j1.0) I3-I1
Loop impedance L1-ground (V2-UV) * (0.0 + j1.0) I1
Loop impedance L2-ground (V3-V1) * (0.0 + j1.0) I2
Loop impedance L3-ground (V1-V2) * (0.0 + j1.0) I3

"Train" option Voltage Current


Loop impedance L1-L2 V1 I1-I2
Loop impedance L2-L3 V2 I2-I3
Loop impedance L3-L1 V3 I3-I1
Loop impedance L1-ground V1 I1, Ie
Loop impedance L2-ground V2 I2, Ie
Loop impedance L3-ground V3 I3, Ie

"Train modify I" option Voltage Current


Loop impedance L1-L2 V1 I1-I2
Loop impedance L2-L3 V2 I2-I3
Loop impedance L3-L1 V3 I3-I1
Loop impedance L1-ground V1 I1-I2
Loop impedance L2-ground V2 I2-I3
Loop impedance L3-ground V3 I3-I1

Protection devices for train networks also use in the overcurrent time trip the vector sum of the
currents in the positive and negative supply. As the currents in PSS SINCAL two-conductor
networks are in opposition, the following currents for this tripping are used:

Option Current in network Current for tripping


Normal, Modify V or Modify V and I I1 I1
Normal, Modify V or Modify V and I I2 I2
Normal, Modify V or Modify V and I I3 I3
Normal, Modify V or Modify V and I Ie Ie
Train and Train Modify I I1 I1-I2
Train and Train Modify I I2 I2-I3
Train and Train Modify I I3 I3-I1
Train and Train Modify I Ie Ie

October 2019 81
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

The use of loop impedances is not helpful in networks with an isolated neutral point. In these
networks, the direction must be determined via the ground current and the ground voltage.

"Isolated" option Voltage Current


Direction detection Ve Ie

Determining Impedance with Conventional Method

With the conventional method for calculating the impedance, the protection device uses the
conductor impedance and conductor reactance as the loop impedance. This applies to phase-
phase and phase-ground loops.

The impedances of phase-phase loops have the reference

𝑉1 − 𝑉2 = 𝑅𝑙 × (𝐼1 − 𝐼2 ) + 𝑗𝑋𝑙 × (𝐼1 − 𝐼2 )

𝑉2 − 𝑉3 = 𝑅𝑙 × (𝐼2 − 𝐼3 ) + 𝑗𝑋𝑙 × (𝐼2 − 𝐼3 )

𝑉3 − 𝑉1 = 𝑅𝑙 × (𝐼3 − 𝐼1 ) + 𝑗𝑋𝑙 × (𝐼3 − 𝐼1 )

After these have been converted, PSS SINCAL shows the active resistances (R 12, R23, R31) and
reactive reactances (X 12, X 23, X31) for the protection device.

𝑅𝑒(𝐼1 − 𝐼2 ) × 𝑅𝑒(𝑉1 − 𝑉2 ) + 𝐼𝑚(𝐼1 − 𝐼2 ) × 𝐼𝑚(𝑉1 − 𝑉2 )


𝑅12 = 2 2
𝑅𝑒(𝐼1 − 𝐼2 ) + 𝐼𝑚(𝐼1 − 𝐼2 )

𝑅𝑒(𝐼1 − 𝐼2 ) × 𝐼𝑚(𝑉1 − 𝑉2 ) − 𝐼𝑚(𝐼1 − 𝐼2 ) × 𝑅𝑒(𝑉1 − 𝑉2 )


𝑋12 = 2 2
𝑅𝑒(𝐼1 − 𝐼2 ) + 𝐼𝑚(𝐼1 − 𝐼2 )

𝑅𝑒(𝐼2 − 𝐼3 ) × 𝑅𝑒(𝑉2 − 𝑉3 ) + 𝐼𝑚(𝐼2 − 𝐼3 ) × 𝐼𝑚(𝑉2 − 𝑉3 )


𝑅23 = 2 2
𝑅𝑒(𝐼2 − 𝐼3 ) + 𝐼𝑚(𝐼2 − 𝐼3 )

𝑅𝑒(𝐼2 − 𝐼3 ) × 𝐼𝑚(𝑉2 − 𝑉3 ) − 𝐼𝑚(𝐼2 − 𝐼3 ) × 𝑅𝑒(𝑉2 − 𝑉3 )


𝑋23 = 2 2
𝑅𝑒(𝐼2 − 𝐼3 ) + 𝐼𝑚(𝐼2 − 𝐼3 )

𝑅𝑒(𝐼3 − 𝐼1 ) × 𝑅𝑒(𝑉3 − 𝑉1 ) + 𝐼𝑚(𝐼3 − 𝐼1 ) × 𝐼𝑚(𝑉3 − 𝑉1 )


𝑅31 = 2 2
𝑅𝑒(𝐼3 − 𝐼1 ) + 𝐼𝑚(𝐼3 − 𝐼1 )

𝑅𝑒(𝐼3 − 𝐼1 ) × 𝐼𝑚(𝑉3 − 𝑉1 ) − 𝐼𝑚(𝐼3 − 𝐼1 ) × 𝑅𝑒(𝑉3 − 𝑉1 )


𝑋31 = 2 2 𝑠
𝑅𝑒(𝐼3 − 𝐼1 ) + 𝐼𝑚(𝐼3 − 𝐼1 )

The impedances of phase-ground loops have the references

𝑅𝑒 𝑋𝑒
𝑉1 = 𝐼1 × (𝑅𝑙 + 𝑗𝑋𝑙 ) − 𝐼𝑒 × (𝑅𝑙 × + 𝑗𝑋𝑙 × )
𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙

𝑅𝑒 𝑋𝑒
𝑉2 = 𝐼2 × (𝑅𝑙 + 𝑗𝑋𝑙 ) − 𝐼𝑒 × (𝑅𝑙 × + 𝑗𝑋𝑙 × )
𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙

82 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

𝑅𝑒 𝑋𝑒
𝑉3 = 𝐼3 × (𝑅𝑙 + 𝑗𝑋𝑙 ) − 𝐼𝑒 × (𝑅𝑙 × + 𝑗𝑋𝑙 × )
𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙

After they have been converted, PSS SINCAL shows the active resistances (R1e, R2e, R3e) and
reactive reactances (X1e, X 2e, X3e) for the protection device.

𝑋𝑒 𝑋
𝑅𝑒 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝑅𝑒(𝑉1 ) + 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑒 × 𝑒 ) × 𝐼𝑚(𝑉1 )
𝑋𝑙 𝑋𝑙
𝑅1𝑒 =
𝑅𝑒 𝑋𝑒 𝑅𝑒 𝑋
𝑅𝑒 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝑅𝑒 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) + 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑒 × 𝑒 )
𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙 𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙

𝑅𝑒 𝑅
𝑅𝑒 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝐼𝑚(𝑉1 ) − 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑒 × 𝑒 ) × 𝑅𝑒(𝑉1 )
𝑅𝑙 𝑅𝑙
𝑋1𝑒 =
𝑅𝑒 𝑋𝑒 𝑅𝑒 𝑋
𝑅𝑒 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝑅𝑒 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) + 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼1 − 𝐼𝑒 × 𝑒 )
𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙 𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙

𝑋𝑒 𝑋
𝑅𝑒 (𝐼2 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝑅𝑒(𝑉2 ) + 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼2 − 𝐼𝑒 × 𝑒 ) × 𝐼𝑚(𝑉2 )
𝑋𝑙 𝑋𝑙
𝑅2𝑒 =
𝑅𝑒 𝑋𝑒 𝑅𝑒 𝑋
𝑅𝑒 (𝐼2 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝑅𝑒 (𝐼2 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) + 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼2 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼2 − 𝐼𝑒 × 𝑒 )
𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙 𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙

𝑅𝑒 𝑅
𝑅𝑒 (𝐼2 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝐼𝑚(𝑉2 ) − 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼2 − 𝐼𝑒 × 𝑒 ) × 𝑅𝑒(𝑉2 )
𝑅𝑙 𝑅𝑙
𝑋2𝑒 =
𝑅𝑒 𝑋𝑒 𝑅𝑒 𝑋
𝑅𝑒 (𝐼2 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝑅𝑒 (𝐼2 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) + 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼2 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼2 − 𝐼𝑒 × 𝑒 )
𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙 𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙

𝑋𝑒 𝑋
𝑅𝑒 (𝐼3 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝑅𝑒(𝑉3 ) + 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼3 − 𝐼𝑒 × 𝑒 ) × 𝐼𝑚(𝑉3 )
𝑋𝑙 𝑋𝑙
𝑅3𝑒 =
𝑅𝑒 𝑋𝑒 𝑅𝑒 𝑋
𝑅𝑒 (𝐼3 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝑅𝑒 (𝐼3 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) + 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼3 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼3 − 𝐼𝑒 × 𝑒 )
𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙 𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙

𝑅𝑒 𝑅
𝑅𝑒 (𝐼3 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝐼𝑚(𝑉3 ) − 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼3 − 𝐼𝑒 × 𝑒 ) × 𝑅𝑒(𝑉3 )
𝑅𝑙 𝑅𝑙
𝑋3𝑒 =
𝑅𝑒 𝑋𝑒 𝑅𝑒 𝑋
𝑅𝑒 (𝐼3 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝑅𝑒 (𝐼3 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) + 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼3 − 𝐼𝑒 × ) × 𝐼𝑚 (𝐼3 − 𝐼𝑒 × 𝑒 )
𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙 𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙

The following references must be set at the protection device.

𝑅𝑒 𝑋𝑒
𝑎𝑛𝑑
𝑅𝑙 𝑋𝑙

Determining Impedance with Reactance Method

With the reactance method for calculating the impedance, the protection device uses the arc
impedance and conductor reactance as the loop impedance. This applies to phase-phase and
phase-ground loops.

October 2019 83
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

In the event of a phase-phase fault, the protection device measures the arc resistance.

m * Zl (1-m) * Zl
Il1
L1

Il2
L2

Il3
L3
IF
RF

m * Ze (1-m) * Zl
Il1
N

In the event of a phase-ground fault, the protection device measures the arc resistance and the
load resistance.

m * Zl (1-m) * Zl
Il1
L1

Il2
L2

Il3
L3

RF

m * Ze IF (1-m) * Zl
Il1
N

The reactance method uses a compensation angle α to compensate for the effect of different
conductor angles with a power supply from both ends, high fault resistances etc.

The reactance method works with an equivalent current in order to prevent measuring faults. The
equivalent current can be selected as required.

Phase-Ground Fault

The protection device cannot measure the current IF with a double ended supply of the ground
fault. Three times the zero current is therefore taken as the equivalent current for phase-ground
loops. As the impedance in the return conductor does not match the impedance in the phase, the
return conductor current is determined in the conventional way using the factors for the ground
impedance. The following applies:

𝑉𝑙𝑒 = 𝑍𝑙 × (𝐼𝑙 + 𝐼𝑒 ) + 𝑅𝐹 × 𝐼𝐹

84 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

The equivalent current Iers is added on both sides of the equation.

𝑉𝑙𝑒 × 𝐼𝑒𝑟𝑠 = 𝑍𝑙 × (𝐼𝑙 + 𝐼𝑒 ) × 𝐼𝑒𝑟𝑠 + 𝑅𝐹 × 𝐼𝐹 × 𝐼𝑒𝑟𝑠

As the equivalent current can be selected as required, the complex conjugate of the fault current IF
is taken as the equivalent current Iers.

𝑉𝑙𝑒 × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝐹 ) = 𝑍𝑙 × (𝐼𝑙 + 𝐼𝑒 ) × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝐹 ) + 𝑅𝐹 × 𝐼𝐹 × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝐹 )

2
𝑉𝑙𝑒 × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝐹 ) = 𝑍𝑙 × (𝐼𝑙 + 𝐼𝑒 ) × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝐹 ) + 𝑅𝐹 × |𝐼𝐹 |

As a result

2
𝑅𝐹 × |𝐼𝐹 |

is a pure real value. The following therefore applies to the imaginary part:

𝐼𝑚[𝑉𝑙𝑒 × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝐹 )] = 𝐼𝑚[𝑍𝑙 × (𝐼𝑙 + 𝐼𝑒 ) × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝐹 )] + 𝑗0.0

As the conductor angle φ is provided as an entry value, the following applies:

𝐼𝑚[𝑉𝑙𝑒 × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝐹 )] = 𝐼𝑚[|𝑍𝑙 | × 𝑒 𝑗𝜑 × (𝐼𝑙 + 𝐼𝑒 ) × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝐹 )] + 𝑗0.0

𝐼𝑚[𝑉𝑙𝑒 × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝐹 ) × 𝑒 𝑗−𝛼 ]


𝑋𝑙 = × sin 𝜑
𝐼𝑚[𝑒 𝑗𝜑 × (𝐼𝑙 + 𝐼𝑒 ) × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝐹 ) × 𝑒 𝑗−𝛼 ]

The following applies to the arc resistance:

𝐼𝑚[𝑉𝑙𝑒 × 𝑒 𝑗−𝜑 × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝑙 − 𝐼𝑒 )]


𝑅𝑙 =
𝐼𝑚[𝐼𝐹 × 𝑒 𝑗−𝜑 × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝑙 − 𝐼𝑒 )]

Two-Pole Phase-Phase Fault

The protection device cannot measure the current IF with a double ended supply of the short circuit.
The negative-phase sequence current can be used as an equivalent current for the compensation.

𝑉𝑙2 − 𝑉𝑙3 = 𝑍𝑙 × (𝐼𝑙2 − 𝐼𝑙3 ) + 𝑅𝐹 × 𝐼𝐹

𝐼𝑒𝑟𝑠 = 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗 ((𝑎 × 𝑎2 ) × 𝐼2 )

With the addition of the equivalent current and the conversion, the following applies:

𝐼𝑚[(𝑉𝑙2 − 𝑉𝑙3 ) × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝑒𝑟𝑠 ) × 𝑒 𝑗−𝛼 ]


𝑋𝑙 = × sin 𝜑
𝐼𝑚[𝑒 𝑗𝜑 × (𝐼𝑙2 − 𝐼𝑙3 ) × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝑒𝑟𝑠 ) × 𝑒 𝑗−𝛼 ]

𝐼𝑚[(𝑉𝑙2 − 𝑉𝑙3 ) × 𝑒 𝑗−𝜑 × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝑙2 − 𝐼𝑙3 )]


𝑅𝑙 =
𝐼𝑚[𝐼𝑒𝑟𝑠 × 𝑒 𝑗−𝜑 × 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑗(𝐼𝑙2 − 𝐼𝑙3 )]

October 2019 85
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Three-Pole Phase-Phase Fault

With a three-phase short circuit, the negative-phase sequence current equals zero. Only a positive-
phase sequence loop can therefore be evaluated. In the above equations for two-pole phase-phase
faults, the loop is used for the current and the positive-phase sequence current for the fault current.
The positive-phase sequence voltage is used as the voltage of the loop. The positive-phase
sequence uses a compensation angle of 0.0 degrees.

2.3.6 Determining the State of Distance-Protection Device

Distance-protection devices can have the following states:

● Inactive
● Picked-up
● Tripped

Because of the signal locks, protection devices that have already been tripped must be considered
in the future clearing procedure.

Inactive

A distance-protection device is inactive if none of the pickup conditions are fulfilled.

When no pickup conditions have been set, the impedance registered by the distance-protection
device must be outside all impedance areas for the protection device to be inactive.

Picked-up

A distance-protection device has been picked up if one of the pickup conditions is fulfilled.

When no pickup conditions have been set, the registered impedance of the distance-protection
device must be inside at least one impedance area for the protection device to be picked up.

Tripped

In every simulation loop, the protection device with the smallest tripping time (either a distance
protection device or OC device) is considered tripped.

To allow for calculation errors, a safety time interval is added to the smallest tripping time.

All protection devices within this interval trip. If the smallest tripping time is 150 ms and the safety
time interval is 0.5 ms, all the protection devices with tripping times less than 150.5 ms trip.

2.3.7 PSS SINCAL Diagrams

PSS SINCAL has two types of diagram to display the results on the screen:

● Double logarithmic current-time diagram


● Linear R-X diagram

86 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

PSS SINCAL provides various diagram types so that settings and evaluations are easier for the
user to handle.

Current-time coordinates must be calculated from the impedance areas to a protection device to be
displayed in the double logarithmic current-time diagram.

A loop passing through all impedance areas, and sorted according to tripping times, determines
these coordinates as follows:

● PSS SINCAL determines the impedance at the intersection of the straight lines and the limit of
the impedance area

𝑖𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑑𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 → 𝑍𝑆𝑝

● The present current and the impedance registered are the impedance current

|𝑍𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑝 |
𝐼Sp = 𝐼trip ×
|𝑍𝑆𝑝 |

● The tripping time for the current impedance is the same as the time t Sp when the current ISp also
trips. A pair of coordinates for the double logarithmic current-time diagram has been calculated
completely.

These current-time coordinates in the double logarithmic current-time diagram are stair-shaped.

Advantages of an R-X Diagram

● This is a simple way to compare the areas.


● The impedance up to the fault location is displayed as an arrow.
● They can be compared with OC protection devices.

The following illustration shows a R-X diagram.

Advantages of a Double Logarithmic Current-Time Diagram

● This is a simple way to compare these with the characteristic curves of distance-protection
devices.
● It shows the destruction limit.

October 2019 87
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

The following illustration shows a double logarithmic current-time diagram.

2.4 Differential Protection Devices


A tripping time and a differential protection zone are used to describe differential protection
devices. Basically, differential protection devices trip if there is a fault in the differential protection
zone.

When you specify a differential protection zone, you can use OCs and distance protection devices
to limit a differential protection zone in the reliability calculations. Then you do not have to specify
individual protection devices. This, however, has no effect on the protection simulation.

2.4.1 Differential Protection Zones

To limit a protection zone, the topology of the protection device and the differential protection group
are necessary. Depending on the entry, PSS SINCAL has the following protection zones:

Differential Protection for Nodes or Busbars

All differential protection devices in a differential protection group must have the same insert node.
In PSS SINCAL, however, not all the node or busbar connections need a protection device. For
Reliability, it is sufficient to define only one device for this type of protection zone.

88 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

The following illustration shows a busbar differential protection with a protection device.

B1

B1

The following illustration shows a busbar differential protection with multiple protection devices.

B1 B1

B1

Differential Protection for Elements

All differential protection devices in a differential protection group must be placed at the same
network element.

The following illustration shows an element differential protection in a line.

B1 B1

The following illustration shows an element differential protection at a transformer.

B1 B1

Differential Protection for Network Areas

Differential protection devices in a differential protection group must comprise an entire network
area. These devices are placed at different elements in different nodes.

The following illustration shows a network area differential protection in lines.

B1 B1

B1

October 2019 89
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Ground Fault Differential Protection

This requires the differential protection devices of a differential protection group to completely
surround a neutral point.

The following illustration shows a ground fault differential protection at a transformer on a single
busbar.

M1

M2

This only requires the creation of a differential protection device. The protection device to be
created is located at measuring point M1. The protection device is supplied with the phase currents
from the measuring point M1. As a ground and phase transformer can be assigned with any
protection device, the one at the transformer neutral point is entered as a ground transformer. Only
a current transformer is therefore located at measuring point M2. The data of the ground
transformer must be entered at the protection device in measuring point 1 as measuring point 2.

The following illustration shows a ground fault differential protection at a transformer on a double
busbar.

M1

M3
M2

This requires the creation of two differential protection devices. The protection devices to be
created are located at measuring points M1 and M3. The protection devices are supplied with the
phase currents from measuring points M1 and M3. A phase and ground transformer is assigned to
the protection device in M1. As with the protection device above, the data of the ground
transformer must be entered at the measuring point 1 as measuring point 2. Only a current
transformer is therefore located at measuring point M2. Only the phase current from the protection
device in measuring point 3 is required.

2.4.2 Simplified Model

Protection of Network Elements: At differential protection devices there is a pickup and tripping if
the total fault current exceeds 5 percent of the largest transformer rated current.

90 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

Ground Fault Differential Protection: With differential protection devices pickup or tripping do not
occur if the neutral point current exceeds the largest rated transformer current by 5 percent.

Pickup and tripping are true for all differential protection devices in the differential protection zone.

Since a tripping time can be indicated for all differential protection devices, tripping automatically
transfers at the smallest indicated time.

B1 B1 B2 B2

B1

A fault in Differential Protection Area B1 creates faults at all the devices in this zone. This fault has
no effect on the neighboring Differential Protection Zone B 2. None of the devices of the neighboring
zone have any pickup.

B1 B1

t = 50 msec t = 50 msec

t = 75 msec B1

Automatic transfer causes all the differential protection devices in Zone B1 to trip at 50
milliseconds.

2.4.3 Device Model

With this model a measuring point is assigned to each differential protection device of a differential
protection area. The setting values must only be specified for the differential protection device of
measuring point 1. All other measuring points use the same setting values.

B1 – M1 B1 – M2

B2 – M2 B2 – M1

B1 – M 3

The differential protection is based on the sum of the currents which flow through the transformers
of all measuring points. As the transformer and element rated currents may be different, the current
values must be adapted. This is carried out with the rated current of the protection object and the
primary transformer rated current.

October 2019 91
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Determination of the Primary Currents

The inputs for the currents of the measuring points at the differential protection device are
connected with the corresponding current transformers in a secondary circuit. The differential
protection device calculates the primary currents in the network with the help of the primary and
secondary current transformer rated current, which must be entered as setting values (see
Differential Protection Settings screen form, Measuring Points tab).

The specified current transformer rated currents must correspond to the rated currents of the
current transformers installed in the network. Differing current transformer rated currents would
cause accidental tripping.

Considering the Polarity of Current Transformers

The connection of the current transformer is determined by the polarity specified.

● Polarity with the measuring point activated:


The measuring point receives the negative current of the current transformer.
● Polarity at measuring point not activated:
The measuring point receives the current of the current transformer.

Setting the polarity makes it possible to use one transformer for several protection devices. This
reduces the number of current transformers required.

Rated Current of the Protection Object

The rated current of the protection object is calculated from the entered setting values for rated
voltage and rated apparent power.

𝑆𝑛
𝐼n obj =
√3 × 𝑉

Adjusting the Current Magnitude

The factor k for adjusting the magnitude is produced for each measuring point via the rated current
of the transformer and the current calculated with the maximum rated apparent power.

Differential protection for two-winding transformers: Smax = MAX (Sn1, Sn2)

Differential protection for three-winding transformers: Smax = MAX (Sn1, Sn2, Sn3)

Differential protection for lines and busbars: Smax = Sn1

𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝐼max =
√3 × 𝑉

𝐼𝑝
k=
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥

92 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

Vector Group Adjustment of the Current

For a transformer differential protection, the vector groups of each winding and the phase rotation
of the second and third winding must be specified. The phase rotation of the transformer can take
this information into account for determining the differential current.

Vector group and rotation are used for determining the connection of the winding between the
individual conductors. The following example shows the vector group adjustment using a DYN1
transformer.

With this transformer the first winding is connected on the primary side (D winding) between L1 and
L2 as well as on the secondary side (Y winding) between L1 and ground.

L1
I1s
I1Y
Primary I1D
Secondary

I1p
L1
L2 ZEsec
I2p

The following applies accordingly to this transformer: The second and third winding are connected
on the primary side (D winding) between L2 and L3 as well as between L3 and L1. The second and
third winding are connected on the secondary side (Y winding) between L2 and ground as well as
between L3 and ground.

The following thus applies to the vector group adjustment of the current for this transformer:

𝐼1𝑌 = 𝐼1𝑠

𝐼2𝑌 = 𝐼2𝑠

𝐼3𝑌 = 𝐼3𝑠

𝐼1𝑌
𝐼1𝐷 =
1.732

𝐼2𝑌
𝐼2𝐷 =
1.732

𝐼3𝑌
𝐼3𝐷 =
1.732

𝐼1𝑝 = 𝐼1𝐷 − 𝐼3𝐷

𝐼2𝑝 = 𝐼2𝐷 − 𝐼1𝐷

𝐼3𝑝 = 𝐼3𝐷 − 𝐼2𝐷

October 2019 93
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Determination of the Pickup and Tripping (Protection of Network Elements)

The differential protection device calculates a differential current I diff and a stabilization current Istab
for each protection area.

𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓 = |𝐼1 × 𝑘1 + 𝐼2 × 𝑘2 + 𝐼𝑛 × 𝑘𝑛 |

𝐼𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑏 = |𝐼1 × 𝑘1 | + |𝐼2 × 𝑘2 | + |𝐼𝑛 × 𝑘𝑛 |

These two currents are referenced to the rated current of the protection object I n obj of the particular
measuring point.

To illustrate the effect, three important operating states are examined in the following example.

W1 W2
Protection object
I1 I2

I1 + I2

I1 … Short circuit current side 1


I2 … Short circuit current side 2
S … Protection device
W1 … Transformer 1
W2 … Transformer 2

Determination of the Pickup and Tripping (Ground Differential Protection)

The differential protection device calculates a differential current I diff and a stabilization current Istab
for each protection area.

𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓 = |𝐼𝐿1 × 𝑘1 + 𝐼𝐿2 × 𝑘1 + 𝐼𝐿3 × 𝑘1 − 𝐼𝐸 × 𝑘2 |

𝐼𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑏 = |𝐼𝐿1 × 𝑘1 | + |𝐼𝐿2 × 𝑘1 | + |𝐼𝐿3 × 𝑘1 | + |𝐼𝐸 × 𝑘2 |

These two currents are referenced to the rated current of the protection object I n obj of the particular
measuring point.

94 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

To illustrate the effect, three important operating states are examined in the following example.

Protection object

W1

S S = IL1 + IL2 + IL3 – IE

W2

IL1 … Ground fault current phase L1


IL2 … Ground fault current phase L2
IL3 … Ground fault current phase L3
IE … Ground fault current neutral point
S … Protection device
W1 … Transformer 1
W2 … Transformer 2

Through Fault Current during Error-Free Operation or External Short Circuit:

During error-free operation or external short circuit the differential current is I diff = 0 and the
stabilization current Istab = 0.

𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓 = |𝐼𝐿1 × 𝑘1 + 𝐼𝐿2 × 𝑘1 + 𝐼𝐿3 × 𝑘1 − 𝐼𝐸 × 𝑘2 | = 0

𝐼𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑏 = |𝐼𝐿1 × 𝑘1 | + |𝐼𝐿2 × 𝑘1 | + |𝐼𝐿3 × 𝑘1 | + |𝐼𝐸 × 𝑘2 | = 0

Internal Short Circuit, Supply from Both Sides with Equal Currents:

I2 = I1 then applies.

𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓 = |𝐼1 + 𝐼2 | = |𝐼1 + 𝐼1 | = 2 × |𝐼1 |

𝐼𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑏 = |𝐼1 | + |𝐼2 | = |𝐼1 | + |𝐼1 | = 2 × |𝐼1 |

In this case, both currents Idiff and Istab are of the same value and are equal to the total short circuit
current.

Internal and External Ground Faults:

In these cases, a current flows across the neutral point.

𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓 = |𝐼𝐿1 × 𝑘1 + 𝐼𝐿2 × 𝑘1 + 𝐼𝐿3 × 𝑘1 − 𝐼𝐸 × 𝑘2 | <> 0

𝐼𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑏 = |𝐼𝐿1 × 𝑘1 | + |𝐼𝐿2 × 𝑘1 | + |𝐼𝐿3 × 𝑘1 | + |𝐼𝐸 × 𝑘2 | <> 0

October 2019 95
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Using the stabilization current Istab referenced to the nominal current, the referenced characteristic
current Ichar ref is determined using the tripping characteristic curve of the protection device.

𝐼𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑏
𝐼𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑏 𝑟𝑒𝑓 =
𝐼𝑛 𝑜𝑏𝑗

Idiff
In obj

Pickup
I

No pickup

Istab
In obj

Tripping is only possible if the referenced characteristic current is in the pickup range. On pickup
the characteristic current is determined in amperes from the referenced characteristic current.

𝐼𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑟 = 𝐼𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑟 𝑟𝑒𝑓 × 𝐼𝑛 𝑜𝑏𝑗

The further test for tripping is carried out differently for internal and external ground faults. The
decision to select either an internal or external ground fault is based on the direction current I dir,
which is determined as follows.

𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑟 = |𝐼𝐸 × 𝑘2 − 𝐼𝐿1 × 𝑘1 − 𝐼𝐿2 × 𝑘1 − 𝐼𝐿3 × 𝑘1 | − |𝐼𝐸 × 𝑘2 + 𝐼𝐿1 × 𝑘1 − 𝐼𝐿2 × 𝑘1 − 𝐼𝐿3 × 𝑘1 |

For external ground faults:

𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑟 > 0

For internal ground faults:

𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑟 < 0

The current for testing the tripping Itrip is calculated as follows:

For external ground faults:

𝐼𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑝 = 𝐼𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑟 + 4.05657 × 𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑟

For internal ground faults:

𝐼𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑝 = 𝐼𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑟

Tripping occurs if the neutral point current exceeds the tripping current.

|𝐼𝐸 | ≥ 𝐼𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑝

On tripping, a transfer trip automatically occurs for all protection devices of the differential
protection area.

96 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

Elimination of the Zero Current

With ground fault differential protection the zero current is not eliminated.

If ground faults occur outside of grounded transformers, a zero current can flow over them. As this
current only occurs in one winding of the transformer, it is not detected by the current difference
detection.

The elimination of the zero current is carried out if the ground is active. For this 1/3 of the ground
current is added to each phase current.

Base Tripping

The basic tripping here is defined via Idiff>, starting point 1, gradient 1, starting point 2, gradient 2
and the associated delay time t>. The pickup is checked for each measuring point.

Idiff
In obj
7
6 Gradient 2
Idiff>> 5
4
3 Gradient 1
2
Idiff> 1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Istab
In obj
Starting point 1 Starting point 2

Protection of Network Elements: If a measuring point picks up, a tripping and a transfer trip
automatically occurs for all protection devices of the differential protection area.

Ground Fault Differential Protection: The characteristic curve is only used here to determine the
pickup. All protection devices of the area with differential protection are tripped and transfer tripped
if the neutral point current exceeds the tripping current.

High Set Tripping

The high set tripping is defined via Idiff>> and the associated delay time t>>. The pickup is checked
for each measuring point.

If a measuring point picks up, a transfer trip automatically occurs for all protection devices of the
differential protection area.

2.4.4 Assignment of Measuring Points

The assignment makes it possible to process different measuring points identically for the tripping.
The polarity of the current transformer is also important here.

October 2019 97
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

With differential protection, a protection device with a current transformer is provided at each
measuring point. However, protection devices are often located directly at infeeders and feeders in
the network. These devices (with transformer) can also be used for differential protection.

M1 M2

OC1 OC2

M3 M4
G
OC3 OC4

In the above example, the infeeder, generator and the two secondary transformer feeders are
protected with an OC protection. The transformer has no protection. However, it is surrounded by
protection devices which have a negative total current that always produces the value 0.0 in the
event of faults on the transformer. These devices can therefore always be used for differential
protection.

For this, differential protection setting values are entered for each protection device in the
protection device dialog box in addition to the OC setting values, and two-winding transformer is
selected as the protection object.

Protection devices must be taken as measuring point 1 and measuring point 2, between which the
phase rotation of the transformer occurs.

Measuring points 3 and 4 can then be selected as required. However, an assignment must be
specified for these two measuring points. The assignment must be made so that the phase rotation
of the transformer for these two measuring points is correctly considered.

The entry in the protection device dialog box is therefore as follows:

Device Measuring point Polarity Assignment


OC1 M1 activated
OC 2 M2 activated
OC 3 M3 activated M1
OC 4 M4 activated M2

The OC3 protection device (measuring point 3) is located on the same side of the transformer as
protection device OC1 (measuring point 1). There is also no phase rotation between these two
devices. The same applies to protection devices OC2 and OC4 (measuring points 2 and 4).

The assignment to another measuring point enables the vector group adjustment to be carried out,
as described in the Device Model. A differential protection for the two-winding transformer and
three-winding transformer protection objects is therefore not restricted to two or three protection
devices. Up to 12 devices can thus be used for these protection objects for limiting the differential
protection area.

98 October 2019
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

2.5 Voltage Protection


Voltage protection shields network elements from breakdowns as well as increases in voltage.
Neither of these operating conditions is desirable in electric networks and can – among other things
– lead to an increase in current, insulation and stability problems.

Example for Areas of Application

● Modern electronically controlled network elements such as, for example, PV systems.
In the normal operation and in short circuit, PV systems feed nearly the same amount of
current into the network. These network elements can no longer be switched off because of the
current, so you can only switch off because of the voltage at the node.
● Monitoring long weakly loaded lines:
Because of the capacitance to ground, the voltage increases at the end of the line.

2.5.1 Undervoltage Protection

Undervoltage Protection has two steps. Both the voltage limit and the time for this limit need to be
entered for each step. The type of measurement has to be determined for both steps. You can
select from the following values:

● Phase-Phase:
The voltage is monitored for all three phase-phase voltages. Any violation to the voltage limit of
phase-phase voltage is enough to cause tripping.
● Phase-Ground:
The voltage is monitored for all three phase-ground voltages. Any violation to the voltage limit
of phase-ground voltage is enough to cause tripping.
● Positive System:
Positive system voltage is determined from the three phase-ground voltages.

1
𝑉𝑀 = × (𝑉1 + 𝑉2 × 𝑎 + 𝑉3 × 𝑎2 )
3
● Negative System:
Negative system voltage is determined from the three phase-ground voltages.

1
𝑉𝐺 = × (𝑉1 + 𝑉2 × 𝑎2 + 𝑉3 × 𝑎)
3
● Ground:
Ground voltage is determined from the three phase-ground voltages.

𝑉𝐸 = 𝑉1 + 𝑉2 + 𝑉3

As soon as the voltage falls below the limit, protection trips at the time indicated.

October 2019 99
PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

2.5.2 Overvoltage Protection

Overvoltage Protection has two steps. Both the voltage limit and the time for this limit need to be
entered for each step. The type of measurement has to be determined for both steps. You can
select from the following values:

● Phase-Phase:
The voltage is monitored for all three phase-phase voltages. Any violation to the voltage limit of
phase-phase voltage is enough to cause tripping.
● Phase-Ground:
The voltage is monitored for all three phase-ground voltages. Any violation to the voltage limit
of phase-ground voltage is enough to cause tripping.
● Positive System:
Positive system voltage is determined from the three phase-ground voltages.

1
𝑉𝑀 = × (𝑉1 + 𝑉2 × 𝑎 + 𝑉3 × 𝑎2 )
3
● Negative System:
Negative system voltage is determined from the three phase-ground voltages.

1
𝑉𝐺 = × (𝑉1 + 𝑉2 × 𝑎2 + 𝑉3 × 𝑎)
3
● Ground:
Ground voltage is determined from the three phase-ground voltages.

𝑉𝐸 = 𝑉1 + 𝑉2 + 𝑉3

As soon as the voltage exceeds the limit, protection trips at the time indicated.

2.6 Frequency Protection


The frequency protection has the task of protecting network elements both from a frequency
decrease as well as from a frequency increase. Both operating states are not desired in the
electrical network and cause problems including stability problems.

Example of Application Areas

Modern electronically controlled network elements that are only designed for a particular frequency.
Useful operation is not possible if the frequency is different. Only the disconnection is therefore
possible due to the frequency at the node.

Underfrequency Protection

The protection device determines the frequency via the voltage transformer. The frequency can no
longer be determined below the specified minimum voltage.

100 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

Three tripping zones are provided for underfrequency protection. The frequency limit and the
associated tripping time must be specified for each step. The protection is tripped in the specified
time as soon as the frequency falls below the frequency limit and the voltage is above the minimum
voltage (phase-phase).

Overfrequency Protection

The protection device determines the frequency via the voltage transformer. The frequency can no
longer be determined below the specified minimum voltage.

The protection is tripped in the specified time as soon as the frequency limit is exceeded and the
voltage is above the minimum voltage (phase-phase).

2.7 Malfunction
The following states can be simulated depending on the selection made in Basic Data – Protection
Location:

● No malfunction:
The protection device and the switchoff are simulated without any fault behavior.
● Protection device malfunction:
This simulates the fault behavior of the protection device. The protection device remains in the
"not started" state. There is therefore also no switchoff.
● Breaker malfunction:
This simulates a malfunction on switchoff. The protection device is excited depending on the
current and transfers the switchoff command on tripping. The switchoff command is not
however executed. There is also therefore no switchoff. The protection device also registers a
current after the switchoff command is sent. After a delay time has elapsed, the "Breaker
malfunction" signal is also activated in addition to the already available signals.

2.8 Teleprotection
In the real world, signal lines connect OC and distance-protection devices. Signals from other
protection devices therefore can influence the behavior of individual protection devices.

The signals can thus be processed in any form between protection devices.

● OC protection device – OC protection device


● OC protection device – distance-protection device
● Distance-protection device – OC protection device
● Distance-protection device – distance-protection device

There is no limit to the number of signals, either. The following signal types are available.

● Yes (short 1): Condition is fulfilled


● No (short 0): Condition is not fulfilled

To define a teleprotection, the following must be entered:

October 2019 101


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Protection Device Receiving the Signal (Receiver)

● Name of protection device


● Zone for signal reception
● Tripping (phase or ground)

Protection Device Sending the Signal (Sender)

● Name of protection device


● Zone for signal sending
● Tripping (phase or ground)
● Type of signal

It must be remembered that a signal can only be used on one zone.

2.8.1 Signals at Protection Devices

A signal (Yes or 1/No or 0) is sent to each OC protection device for the phase and ground setting at
each tripping zone. The following tripping zones are available:

● OC tripping Ip
● OC tripping I>
● OC tripping I>>
● OC tripping I>>>

A signal (yes or 1/no or 0) is likewise assigned to each fuse. Only the OC Tripping Ip can be
assigned to a fuse.

Each distance-protection device has a signal (Yes or 1/No or 0) for phase and ground setting at
each tripping zone. The following tripping zones are available:

● 1st level (user-defined and predefined)


● 2nd level (user-defined and predefined)
● 3rd level (user-defined and predefined)
● 4th level (predefined)
● 5th level (predefined)
● 6th level (predefined)
● DI designated zone (name of a Siemens or freely defined area)

A signal (yes or 1/no or 0) is assigned to each OC and DI protection device for each type of pickup
for phase and ground settings. The following pickups are available:

● Pickup forward
● Pickup reverse
● Pickup non-directional
● Minimum current pickup
● Directional current pickup
● Non-directional current pickup
● UI pickup
● Undervoltage pickup
● Area pickup

102 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

The receiving protection device can be controlled directly irrespective of the zone/level. For this the
zone None must be used.

Each protection device is also assigned the

● breaker malfunction

signal (yes or 1). The breaker malfunction signal No is not available.

The sending protection device can be controlled for breaker malfunction irrespective of the
zone/level. For this the zone/level None must be used.

2.8.2 Signals for Zones

Each tripping zone always supplies a signal depending on the state of the protection device and
the zone.

State of the Protection Device: Not Tripped

Zone when picked up tripping is selected:

Type of signal Signal


Pickup – yes 1
Pickup – no 0
Tripping – yes 0
Tripping – no 1

Zone when not picked up tripping is selected:

Type of signal Signal


Pickup – yes 0
Pickup – no 1
Tripping – yes 0
Tripping – no 1

State of the Protection Device: Tripped

Zone when tripped tripping is selected:

Type of signal Signal


Pickup – yes 0
Pickup – no 1
Tripping – yes 1
Tripping – no 0

October 2019 103


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Zone when not tripped tripping is selected:

Type of signal Signal


Pickup – yes 0
Pickup – no 1
Tripping – yes 0
Tripping – no 1

2.8.3 Signal Interlock for Zones

Each individual zone of a protection device has inputs for external signals in addition to the inputs
of the current and voltage transformer.

Each zone also supplies information as a signal with regard to pickup/trip. This signal can be
logically linked with the external signals.

Zone with Input and Output

V/I Zone Int. Binary Off


pickup/tripping logic

Ext

The binary logic processes the internal signal of the zone with the external signal in order to obtain
the required behavior:

● Interlock
● Transfer trip
● Tripping

The signal inputs and outputs are connected with the data of a signal transfer as follows.

Teleprotection

V/I Zone Int. Binary Off


pickup/tripping logic Sender zone

Receiver
zone

V/I Zone Int. Binary Off


pickup/tripping logic

104 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

If several signals are assigned to one input, these are likewise logically linked. The signals are
logically ORed if a signal group is not specified.

Zone Int. Binary


Sender 1
pickup/tripping logic

Sender 2
OR

Sender 3

The signals are logically ANDed and ORed if a signal group is specified.

Sender 1/group 1
Zone Int. Binary
pickup/tripping logic
Sender 2/group 1
AND

Sender 3/group 1

OR
Sender 4/group 2

AND
Sender 4/group 2

Sender/no group

2.8.4 Example for Blocked Tripping

Signals should ideally be blocked to trip faults in the first line to be protected. For reasons of
simplification, this example shows a purely Ohmic line with a resistance of three Ohms.

R=3 Ohm
K1 SG1 SG2 K2

Individual impedance areas register at different distances into the line. In this example, the
following is true for both protection devices:

𝑅1 = 2 𝑂ℎ𝑚

𝑅1𝐵 = 3.05 𝑂ℎ𝑚

𝑅2 = 4 𝑂ℎ𝑚

October 2019 105


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

The fault occurs at a distance of 2.5 Ohm. The signal for the stipulated tripping level R 1B, t1B is
always the tripping level R1, t1 of the protection device located opposite.

Range of Tripping Areas

t SG2 SG1

R2, t2 R2, t2

R1B, t1B R1, t1 R1, t1 R1B, t1B

K1 SG1 SG2 K2

Signal Behavior

t SG2 SG1

R1, t1 R1B, t1B

K1 K2
SG1 SG2
Signal of SG2 and
level R1, t1 = ENERGIZED

Protection Devices with Tripping Times

Clearing time of the fault: t1B

t1B t1

K1 SG1 SG2 K2

In our example, the protection device’s switching time must be greater than:

∆𝑡 = 𝑡1𝐵 − 𝑡1

2.9 Loop Selection


The impedance loops are used in different ways for checking the pickup in the event of phase or
ground faults. For this to be possible, the protection device must be able to distinguish between the
two fault types. This distinction is based on the ground fault detection. This is based on threshold
values for ground current Ie Lim and ground voltage Ve Lim.

106 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

The current and the voltage for the ground fault detection can be provided via a separate ground
transformer.

𝐼𝑒 = 𝐼𝑔𝑟𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑒𝑟

𝑉𝑒 = 𝑉𝑔𝑟𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑒𝑟

If this is not available, current and voltage are taken from the values of the phase transformer.

𝐼𝑒 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 + 𝐼3

𝑉𝑒 = 𝑉1 + 𝑉2 + 𝑉3

These values for current and voltage are compared with the respective threshold value and supply
a logic state (0 or 1) as an output signal. Depending on the protection device parameters, the two
outputs are processed differently in order to detect a ground fault.

Ie |Ie| > Ie Lim Ground fault

Ve |Ve| > Ve Lim Ground fault

Ie |Ie| > Ie Lim

OR Ground fault

Ve |Ve| > Ve Lim

Ie |Ie| > Ie Lim

AND Ground fault

Ve |Ve| > Ve Lim

2.10 Checking of Destruction through Overheating


The protection coordination carries out a check of the elements for destruction through
overheating. For each time step the thermal energy is determined from current and duration of the
time step for the checked elements. This thermal energy is totalized up to the clearing of the fault.

𝐸 = ∑ 𝐼 2 × ∆𝑡

The energy is monitored for any violation of the destruction energy of the element. In the event of a
limit violation

● a warning is output in the protection coordination,


● an underfunction is displayed in the protection analysis (if the check for destruction is activated)

October 2019 107


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

and the maximum disconnection time is logged.

If there are reclosers in the network, only the time up to the first clearing is used. The check of the
destruction through overheating is not carried out with stability protection coordination.

2.11 Determining Tripping and Waiting Times for Protection Devices


Calculations for the tripping time of a protection device do not depend on the type of protection
device. The following times are considered in the calculations:

Waiting Time

time from when the fault was encountered until the protection device was picked-up

Imaginary Waiting Time

waiting time calculated due to peculiarities in the algorithm to calculate the tripping time and waiting
time for a protection device

Present Tripping Time

protection device tripping time determined from existing currents and voltages

Previous Fault-Clearing Time

clearing time for final calculations

Present Fault-Clearing Time

clearing time for present calculations

2.11.1 Sequence to Determine Times

The time is determined as follows:

Tripping Conditions for Phase Faults

● Values – phase 1
● Values – phase 2
● Values – phase 3

Tripping Conditions for Ground Faults

● Values – phase 1
● Values – phase 2
● Values – phase 3

108 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

The tripping times are calculated as follows:

● The tripping time is calculated from setting ranges and phases


● If the tripping range changes for OC protection devices (characteristic-curve tripping, first short
circuit current tripping)
set the previous state of the protection device to inactive
● If the previous state is inactive
set the waiting time the same as the previous clearing time
● If the previous state is picked-up
and the tripping time is less than previous clearing time
– there is immediate tripping for an electronic protection device
– there is delayed tripping for a conventional protection device
● Calculate the present tripping time
add up the waiting time, present tripping time and imaginary waiting time
● Compare this with the clearing time for all previous setting ranges and phases
use the smallest time for each protection device

This algorithm can, however, create a problem with immediate or a delayed tripping.

The present clearing time can be smaller than the previous clearing time. Since, however, this is
impossible, the protection device must be given an imaginary waiting time.

Immediate Tripping

The imaginary waiting time for the protection device is the previous clearing time minus the present
tripping time.

Delayed Tripping

The imaginary waiting time must consider the effects of heat from the new current on the protection
device. Differentiation must be made between the following two cases:

● Tripping time for the current from 1000.0 to 0.3 seconds


The 0.3 seconds must be effectively run out before the protection device trips.
● Tripping time for the current from 0.7 to 0.3 seconds
The tripping time for the current is between 0.3 and 0.7 seconds.

As can be seen in both cases, the algorithm for delayed tripping must consider both the previous
time and the previous current.

2.11.2 Time Register of the Delay Times

The individual tripping units of the protection devices can have an individual or common time
register for the delay time. The type of time register (common or individual) can be set on the
protection device itself.

A common time register for the delay times of the individual tripping units normally results in shorter
clearing times in the network. This is particularly the case if the pickup changes to a tripping unit
with a shorter delay time. This is explained with the following example.

October 2019 109


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

Protection device A with the following structure:

● Tripping unit 1 with 200 millisecond delay time


● Mechanical delay of 30 milliseconds

Protection device B with the following structure:

● Tripping unit 1 with 250 millisecond delay time


● Tripping unit 2 with 750 millisecond delay time
● Mechanical delay of 30 milliseconds

Tripping Behavior of Protection Device B with Common Time Register for the Delay
Time

Time step 1:
A

Tripping after 200 ms

230 ms

Tripping unit 1: not picked up


Tripping unit 2: after 750 ms

Time step 2:
A

Tripping after 200 ms

280 ms

Tripping unit 1: after 250 ms

The common time register for the delay times of tripping unit 1 and 2 starts the delay time when the
fault occurs (pickup of tripping unit 2). After the topology change at 230 milliseconds, tripping unit 1
picks up. The protection device can trip after 250 milliseconds. The fault is cleared after 280
milliseconds.

110 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Simulation

Tripping Behavior of Protection Device B with Individual Time Register for the
Delay Time

Time step 1:
A

Tripping after 200 ms

230 ms

Tripping unit 1: not picked up


Tripping unit 2: after 750 ms

Time step 2:
A

Tripping after 200 ms

510 ms

Tripping unit 1: after 480 ms

The individual time register prevents the delay time of tripping unit 1 from starting until after the
topology change in the network after 230 milliseconds. The protection device trips 250 milliseconds
later after 480 milliseconds. The fault is cleared after 510 milliseconds.

2.11.3 Determining Clearing Times for Faults

PSS SINCAL calculates clearing times for faults as follows:

● These clearing times are made equal to the smallest tripping time of all other protection devices
in the present simulation loop.

Protection calculations stop automatically if:

● There are no more picked-up protection devices


● Current at the fault location is equal to zero

2.11.4 Distance Protection Tripping due to Phase-Fault Setting

For phase-fault tripping, all currents in all phases are used to fulfill the tripping conditions. The
currents in the three phases do not need to be the same size.

To fulfill the phase-tripping conditions, the current for each phase is observed separately.

October 2019 111


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Simulation

The tripping conditions for the phase faults are always checked separately from the actual faults in
the network.

2.11.5 Distance Protection Tripping due to Ground-Fault Setting

Ground tripping occurs only when a ground current that does not equal zero is produced right at
the protection device. The ground current is determined from

𝐼𝑒 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 + 𝐼3

The current through the protection device is different in all three phases. To fulfill the ground-
tripping conditions, the current for each phase is observed separately.

Ground-fault currents can also cause tripping due to phase-fault settings, so the characteristics for
either the phase or ground can cause the protection device to trip.

PSS SINCAL uses the minimum value from the following to determine pickup behavior:

● Current/voltage Phase 1 and settings ground faults


● Current/voltage Phase 2 and settings ground faults
● Current/voltage Phase 3 and settings ground faults
● Current/voltage Phase 1 – Phase 2 and settings phase faults
● Current/voltage Phase 2 – Phase 3 and settings phase faults
● Current/voltage Phase 3 – Phase 1 and settings phase faults

2.11.6 Distance Protection Tripping for Load Current

Load current flowing through the protection device may not pickup the protection device for phase-
fault tripping.

The load flow calculations only determine the current and the voltage for Phase 1. The currents
and voltages in Phases current related to Two and Three are produced by rotating 120 or -120
degrees.

2.12 Recommendations and Warnings


The operator needs to consider the following when determining currents, times and tripping states:

● Protection devices always switch off all three phases simultaneously.


● 1- or 3-phase short circuit current is always determined as maximum short circuit current. If the
short circuit does not occur during crossover (null), there is less present current and the tripping
time is larger. If the damage curve of the network element crosses the tripping curve, it can
lead to heat damage and even change the tripping sequence.
● If the tripping time is greater than the previous fault-clearing time, the tripping time can be reset
so the protection devices that are already picked up do not reach maximum head load and shut
down. Otherwise, this could damage network elements and even change the tripping
sequence.
● When the safety-time interval entered is larger than the switching time, this gap produces
another current distribution for the time between the network’s switching time and safety-time
interval. This condition can alter the tripping sequence.

112 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Routes

3. Protection Routes

The Protection Routes program analyzes the tripping behavior of the protection devices in the
network. The tripping behavior is displayed in diagrams and by highlights in the network graphic.
This enables the correctness of the protection device settings to be examined.

The scope of the analysis can be set via Calculation Settings – Protection Coordination.

Lines with very small impedances cannot be shown in the diagrams or only with difficulty. These
lines can be suppressed in the diagrams.

If you only create specific routes in the network as a diagram, you need to have a Network Element
Group of the type "protection route" for these elements.

Note: PSS SINCAL only generates diagrams for protection devices if these have been switched
ON in the selective grading diagram (see the section on Locating Protection Devices in the chapter
on Data Description in the Input Data Manual).

PSS SINCAL has the following diagrams:

● Tripping Behavior
● Ratio Impedances (Z)
● Ratio Reactances (X)
● Impedance and Tripping Areas

The following graphical network display is provided.

● Highlighting of Protection Routes

3.1 Determining the Protection Routes


The protection routes are determined by means of a network trace. The network is run through
starting from the protection device.

L1 L2

L3 L4

L5

Each further protection device on the route with the same direction can define the end of the
protection route. The Zones for Selective Grading attribute in the Calculation Settings –
Protection Coordination identifies the device representing the end of the protection route by its
position.

October 2019 113


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Routes

In the above network this results in the following routes for the protection device next to the
incoming supply, depending on the Zones for Selective Grading attribute:

● Up to the closest protection device:


Protection route 1: L1
● Up tot he second closest protection device:
Protection route 1: L1 and L2
Protection route 2: L1 and L3
● Up tot he third closest protection device:
Protection route 1: L1 and L2
Protection route 2: L1, L3 and L4
Protection route 3: L1, L3 and L5

The Treatment of Transformers attribute in Calculation Settings – Protection Settings enables the
protection zone (and thus also the protection routes) of the individual protection devices to be
defined. The protection zones can be defined depending on the network modelling. Further
information on this is provided in the section Treatment of Transformers in chapter Defining with
Calculation Settings.

3.2 Determining the Tripping Behavior


All protection routes are run through to determine the tripping routes. This divides up lines of a
protection route. A protection coordination is carried out in all original nodes as well as in the
intermediate nodes of the lines.

The Impedance Limit Line Sections and Number of Sections attributes in Calculation Settings –
Protection Coordination define whether and how many intermediate nodes are considered.

If the impedance of the currently considered line is less than the impedance limit, no intermediate
nodes are generated.

If the impedance of the currently considered line is greater than the impedance limit, intermediate
nodes are generated. With 4 sections, 4 intermediate nodes are considered.

For the above network with 4 sections for protection route L1 and L2 up to 10 protection
coordinations must therefore be carried out.

L1 L2

3.3 Control Data for Protection Routes


The calculation of protection routes is started via Calculate – Protection Device Coordination –
Protection Route.

This opens an Assistant in which the essential parameters for calculating protection routes can be
defined.

114 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Routes

The SC method selection field is used to select the short circuit method. This opens a dialog box
which is also displayed when the Short Circuit Calculation is started.

The Additional Fault Data selection field allows arc and ground impedances to be defined if
required, which are then considered in the protection route calculation.

The Area to be checked section is used to define the extent of the protection route calculation.
The following options can be selected here:

● All:
The protection routes are determined and checked for all protection devices present in the
network.
● Selection:
The protection routes are only determined and checked for those protection devices assigned
to the selected network elements. This option is only available if a selection is present in the
network graphic.
● Network Element Group:
The protection routes are only determined and checked for those network elements contained
in the selected network element group and their assigned protection devices. This option is
only available if a network element group is present.

The Stop at transformer option causes the route determination to stop at a transformer.

The Limit routes by selected group option enables the individual routes are only formed by
elements that are located in the selected network element group. This option is only selectable if a
network element group is selected as a check area.

The Discard routes beyond selected group makes it possible to specify whether routes that are
not located completely within the network element group should be discarded. This option is only
selectable if a network element group is selected as a check area and the Limit routes by
selected group option is selected.

3.4 Results of the Protection Routes


This simulation procedure generates results in the form of diagrams as well as information to
highlight protection routes.

October 2019 115


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Routes

Tripping Behavior

This diagram shows the tripping behavior of protection devices over time, depending on the
impedance registered.

PSS SINCAL generates one diagram per protection route for each protection device. This diagram
also contains protection devices located in the protection route being displayed so that selective
tripping can be set and tripping times can be easily checked.

Ratio Impedances (Z)

This diagram shows the impedance registered by the protection device compared to the amount of
impedance in the protection route. The tripping levels of the protection device are shown as
horizontal lines in the diagram.

116 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Routes

PSS SINCAL generates one diagram per protection route for each protection device.

Ratio Reactances (X)

This diagram shows the reactance registered by the protection device compared to the amount of
reactance in the protection route. The tripping levels of the protection device are shown as
horizontal lines in the diagram.

October 2019 117


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Routes

PSS SINCAL generates one diagram per protection route for each protection device.

Impedance and Tripping Areas

This diagram shows the impedance areas of the protection device. Impedance registered by the
protection device (at the particular node) can also help you visualize the protection route.

118 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Routes

PSS SINCAL generates one diagram per protection route for each protection device.

October 2019 119


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Routes

Highlighting of Protection Routes

The tripping behavior can be graphically visualized for each protection device for each tripping
zone in the network.

120 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

4. Protection Device Settings

This simulation procedure determines the settings for distance protection devices. PSS SINCAL
calculates the values actually set at the protection device from the types of protection devices in
the network and their selective distance factors.

In addition to settings, this simulation procedure also generates diagrams as selective tripping
schedules. Larger high- and medium-voltage networks are updated all the time. This means that a
lot of effort is required to maintain the tripping plans. Formerly, second and third selective tripping
zones in meshed networks had to be calculated by hand. This meant a great deal of work and
yielded calculations that were at best approximate. Now, however, PSS SINCAL can calculate
these levels quickly and accurately.

Basic Calculation Sequence for Protection Device Settings

Download and check all network data

Depending on strategy, reconstruct


the network to determine settings

Short circuit in new network – calculate


wandering short circuit in parallel lines

Loop – steps

Loop – protection device

Set points for limits of boundaries

Set minimum impedance for limits


with the help of short circuits

Calculate settings and tripping area from measurement


type, type of protection device and minimum impedance

Set intersections for protection device tripping area with


network resistance curve (range of protection device)

Have all protection devices No


been calculated?

Have all steps been No


calculated?

Yes
Prepare results

October 2019 121


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

4.1 Supported Protection Device Types


Modern distance-protection devices are like computers that trip and turn off if there is a fault, using
internal programs that measure current and voltage values and their settings.

Protection devices are so complex that they need to be simulated to understand them properly.

A special module has been integrated into PSS SINCAL protection coordination that can simulate
many kinds of distance-protection devices. Additional protection devices can easily be added to the
module.

PSS SINCAL supports the following types of protection devices:

Type Manufacturer
Common
7SA500 SIEMENS
7SA501 SIEMENS
7SA502 SIEMENS
7SA510 SIEMENS
7SA511 SIEMENS
7SA513 SIEMENS
7SA522 SIEMENS
7SA610 SIEMENS
7SA611 SIEMENS
7SA612 SIEMENS
7SA631 SIEMENS
7SA632 SIEMENS
7SA64 SIEMENS
7SA84 SIEMENS
7SA86 SIEMENS
7SA87 SIEMENS
7SL13 SIEMENS
7SL17 SIEMENS
7SL24 SIEMENS
7SL70 SIEMENS
7SL73 SIEMENS
7ST6 SIEMENS
EPAC3100 ALSTOM
EPAC3400 ALSTOM
EPAC3500 ALSTOM
EPAC3600 ALSTOM
EPAC3700 ALSTOM
GRL100 Toshiba
LZ91 ABB
LZ92 ABB
MiCOM P43x ALSTOM
MiCOM P44x ALSTOM
MiCOM P54x ALSTOM
PD531 ALSTOM
PD532 ALSTOM
PD551 ALSTOM
PD552 ALSTOM

122 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

R1KZ4 SIEMENS
R1KZ4A SIEMENS
R1KZ7 SIEMENS
R1KZ7G SIEMENS
R1Z23B SIEMENS
R1Z25 SIEMENS
R1Z25A SIEMENS
R1Z27 SIEMENS
RD10 EAW Relaistechnik GmbH
RED670 ABB
REF630 ABB
REL316 ABB
REL511 ABB
REL521 ABB
REL561 ABB
RK4 SIEMENS
RK4A SIEMENS
SD124 AEG
SD135 AEG
SD135A AEG
SD14 AEG
SD14A AEG
SD14B AEG
SD34A AEG
SD35 AEG
SD35A AEG
SD35C AEG
SD36 AEG
SEL311A Schweitzer Laboratories
SEL311B Schweitzer Laboratories
SEL311C1 Schweitzer Laboratories
SEL311C2 Schweitzer Laboratories
SEL311C3 Schweitzer Laboratories
SEL321 Schweitzer Laboratories

The protection devices normally use the conventional method to determine the impedance of the
impedance loops (selection value STD).

If it is possible to determine an impedance for a protection device type using the reactance method
(RMD selection value), this is carried out explicitly.

4.1.1 How Distance Protection Devices Work

All distance protection devices work in the same way. They determine the impedances of all the
impedance loops (line-line and line-ground) from current and voltage in the 3-phase network.

Then PSS SINCAL checks whether the registered loop impedance is inside one or more prescribed
impedance areas. Each impedance area is assigned a constant tripping time. The constant time
per step produces jumps in the tripping time (steps) if the loop impedances registered are in
different areas.

October 2019 123


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

The settings at the protection device are used as parameters for the impedance area according to
the current network. Depending on the type of protection device, impedance areas are based on
circles or impedance quadrilaterals.

All settings are secondary values at the protection device. The primary values are calculated from
the factor of the current transformer,

𝐼𝑝𝑟𝑖
ü𝐼 =
𝐼𝑠𝑒𝑐

from the factor of the voltage transformer

𝑉𝑝𝑟𝑖
ü𝑉 =
𝑉𝑠𝑒𝑐

and from the settings.

All PSS SINCAL predefined protection device types are described below with the relevant
parameters for PSS SINCAL. Protection device types in a group have the same parameters as
used in PSS SINCAL.

4.1.2 Circular Tripping Areas

To define a circle with the center at the origin of the coordinates, simply enter the radius. Additional
entries can be made to move the center of the circle along the positive resistance axis. Depending
on where the center is, the circle is known as:

● An Impedance Circle:
The center is located in the origin of the coordinate.
● A Modified Impedance Circle:
The center is located between origin of the coordinates and positive radius. The circle passes
through the reactance axis of the impedance area.
● A Conductance Circle:
The center of the circle is located right at the positive radius. Thus, the reactance axis is simply
a tangent of the circle.

This type of protection device is technically known as an analogous protection device. Protection
devices are complicated mechanical measurement devices.

4.1.3 Quadrilateral-Shaped Tripping Areas

The simplest form of the impedance quadrilateral is a rectangle. To define these, simply enter a
value for resistance and reactance in the first quadrants. PSS SINCAL then constructs an area
symmetrical to the resistance and reactance axes. Entering an angle changes the rectangle to a
diamond.

Unlike circles, the two different shapes have no special names:

● Rectangular impedance quadrilateral


● Diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral

124 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Technically, these protection devices are known as digital protection devices and resemble modern
PCs.

Since digital protection devices have become much cheaper to buy and maintain than analogous
protection devices, digital devices are replacing analogous ones. To protect the network when
devices are exchanged, the new devices must be assigned the same tripping area as the old
devices. Newer digital protection devices can also simulate circular tripping areas (digital
analogous protection).

4.1.4 Common

How these devices work:

● Digital protection device with settings R, RF, X, Z, angle  and angle α

Supported Measurement Types with the Conventional Method:

● Impedance Circle
● Modified Impedance Circle
● Conductance Circle
● Impedance Quadrilateral
● Reactance Quadrilateral
● MHO Circle
● MHO Circle Polarized
● MHO Limited
● MHO Limited and Polarized
● Combined Tripping Area

Supported Measuring Types with the Reactance Method:

● Impedance Quadrilateral
● MHO Circle
● MHO Circle Polarized

Rated currents supported:

● PSS SINCAL does not check for a specific rated current.

R [Ohm] and
Zone X [Ohm] Z [Ohm] Angle  [°] Angle α [°]
RF [Ohm]
1 0.001 to 9999.000 0.001 to 9999.000 0.001 to 9999.000 30 to 90 at STD: 0 to 360
(step of 0.001) (step of 0.001) (step of 0.001) (step of 1) (step of 0.1)
at RMD: -40 to 40 (step of 0.1)
2 -"- -"- -"- such as 1 such as α 1
3 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
6 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-

October 2019 125


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R, X and Z is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

ü𝑉
𝑅𝐹𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝐹𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

Conventional Method

The setting value Z is used as the radius of the impedance circle for the measuring types
impedance circle, mixed impedance circle and conductance circle.

The setting value Z is used as the diameter of the mixed impedance circle for the measuring types
MHO circle, MHO circle polarized, MHO limited and MHO limited and polarized.

The setting values R, X, angle α and angle  are used to determine the area for the measuring
types impedance polygon and reactance quadrilateral.

With the combined tripping area measuring type, setting values R, X and α are used (per step). The
angles of the direction element are used as values for β and γ.

With the mixed impedance circle measuring type, the distance to the coordinate origin is calculated
as follows:

∆𝑅 = 𝑍 × cos 𝜑

Reactance Method

With the impedance polygon measuring type, the setting values RF, X, α (per step) and angle  are
used. The compensation angle must be specified as angle α (per step).

The setting values Z, α (per step) and angle  are used for measuring types MHO circle and MHO
circle polarized. The compensation angle must be specified as angle α (per step).

4.1.5 7SA500, 7SA501 and 7SA502

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R and X

126 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm]


1 0.05 to 65.32 (step of 0.01) 0.05 to 65.32 (step of 0.01)
2 -"- -"-
3 -"- -"-
4 -"- -"-
5 -"- -"-
6 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is a rectangular impedance quadrilateral.

Procedural Simulation

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
1.0

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

4.1.6 7SA510, 7SA511 and 7SA513

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R and X

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere

October 2019 127


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

● 5 ampere

Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm]


1 0.05 to 130.00 (step of 0.01) 0.05 to 65.00 (step of 0.01)
2 -"- -"-
3 -"- -"-
4 -"- -"-
5 -"- -"-
6 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is a rectangular impedance quadrilateral.

Procedural Simulation

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
1.0

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

4.1.7 7SA522

How these devices work:

● Digital protection device with settings R, X, Z and angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral
● MHO Circle
● MHO Circle Polarized

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

128 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]


1 0.005 to 250.000 0.005 to 250.000 0.005 to 200.000 30 to 90 (step of 1)
(step of 0.001) (step of 0.001) (step of 0.001)
2 -"- -"- -"- such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"- -"-
6 -"- -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral.

Procedural Simulation

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
1.0

The primary value for R, X and Z is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

or

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

The setting value Z is used as the diameter of the mixed impedance circle for the measuring types
MHO circle and MHO polarized.

The setting values R and X are used to determine the area for the impedance polygon measuring
type.

4.1.8 7SA610, 7SA611, 7SA612, 7SA631 and 7SA632

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R, X and angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

October 2019 129


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.05 to 600.00 (step of 0.01) 0.05 to 600.00 (step of 0.01) 30 to 90 (step of 1)
2 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"-
6 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.01 to 120.00 (step of 0.01) 0.01 to 120.00 (step of 0.01) 30 to 90 (step of 1)
2 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"-
6 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

4.1.9 7SA64

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R, X, Z and angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

130 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

● Impedance Circle

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] and Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.05 to 600.00 (step of 0.01) 0.05 to 600.00 (step of 0.01) 30 to 90 (step of 1)
2 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"-
6 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] and Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.01 to 120.00 (step of 0.01) 0.01 to 120.00 (step of 0.01) 30 to 90 (step of 1)
2 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"-
6 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral or an impedance circle.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R, X and Z is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

The setting value Z is used as the radius of the impedance circle for the measuring type impedance
circle.

October 2019 131


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

The setting values R and X are used to determine the area for the impedance polygon measuring
type.

4.1.10 7SA84, 7SA86 and 7SA87

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R, X, Z, angle  and angle α

Supported Measurement Types with the Conventional Method:

● Impedance Quadrilateral
● MHO Circle
● MHO Circle polarized

Supported Measuring Types with the Reactance Method:

● Impedance Quadrilateral
● MHO Circle
● MHO Circle polarized

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] and Z [Ohm] Angle  [°] Angle α [°]
1 0.05 to 600.00 0.05 to 600.00 30 to 90 -40 to 40
(step of 0.01) (step of 0.01) (step of 1) (step of 0.1)
2 -"- -"- such as 1 such as α1
3 -"- -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"- -"-
6 -"- -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] and Z [Ohm] Angle  [°] Angle α [°]
1 0.01 to 120.00 0.01 to 120.00 30 to 90 -40 to 40
(step of 0.01) (step of 0.01) (step of 1) (step of 0.1)
2 -"- -"- such as 1 such as α1
3 -"- -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"- -"-
6 -"- -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"- -"-

132 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral or an MHO circle.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R, X and Z is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

Conventional Method

The setting value Z is used as the diameter of the impedance circle for the measuring type MHO
circle.

The setting values R and X are used to determine the area for the measuring type impedance
polygon.

Reactance Method

With the impedance polygon measuring type, the setting values R F, X, α (per step) and angle  are
used. The compensation angle must be specified as angle α (per step).

The setting values Z, α (per step) and angle  are used for measuring types MHO circle and MHO
circle polarized. The compensation angle must be specified as angle α (per step).

4.1.11 7SL13

How these devices work:

● Digital protection device with settings X and RX

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

October 2019 133


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Zone X [Ohm] R/X [1] Angle  [°]


1 Resistance chain: 0.02, 0.04, 0.08, 0.15, 0.30, 0.50, 1.00, 2.00, 2,00 88
4.00, 8.00, 16.00 and 32.00
2 Resistance chain: 0.02, 0.04, 0.08, 0.15, 0.30, 0.50, 1.00, 2.00, -"- Such as 1
2.00, 5.00, 10.00, 10.00 and 10.00
3 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral with sides that are always inclined
by 2 degrees.

Procedural Simulation

Note that resistors must have the X value on the secondary side.

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
1.0

Resistance chains of the individual zones have a serial connection with a base resistance of
0.1 ohm. PSS SINCAL automatically adds the base resistance to the indicated settings. When
these settings are passed on in protection device configuration, you need to be very careful that the
values are not reduced a second time by the base resistance. The primary value for R and X is
calculated from

tan 2.0 ü𝑉
𝑋1𝑝𝑟𝑖 = (0.1 + 𝑋1𝑠𝑒𝑐 ) × (1.0 + )×
𝑅/𝑋 ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

tan 2.0 ü𝑉
𝑋2𝑝𝑟𝑖 = (0.1 + 𝑋1𝑠𝑒𝑐 + 𝑋2𝑠𝑒𝑐 ) × (1.0 + )×
𝑅/𝑋 ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

tan 2.0 ü𝑉
𝑋3𝑝𝑟𝑖 = (0.1 + 𝑋1𝑠𝑒𝑐 + 𝑋2𝑠𝑒𝑐 + 𝑋3𝑠𝑒𝑐 ) × (1.0 + )×
𝑅/𝑋 ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

or

𝑅1𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋1𝑝𝑟𝑖 × 𝑅/𝑋

𝑅2𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋2𝑝𝑟𝑖 × 𝑅/𝑋

𝑅3𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋3𝑝𝑟𝑖 × 𝑅/𝑋

4.1.12 7SL17, 7SL24, 7SL70 and 7SL73

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings X and R

134 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

Zone X [Ohm] R/X [1] Angle  [°]


1 Resistance chain: 0.02, 0.04, 0.08, 0.15, 0.30, 0.50, 1.00 to 4,00 (step of 1) 88
1.00, 2.00, 4.00, 8.00, 16.00 and 32.00
2 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral with sides that are always inclined
by 2 degrees.

Procedural Simulation

Note that resistors must have the X value on the secondary side.

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
1.0

Resistance chains of the individual zones have a serial connection with a base resistance of
0.1 ohm. PSS SINCAL automatically adds the base resistance to the indicated settings. When
these settings are passed on in protection device configuration, you need to be very careful that the
values are not reduced a second time by the base resistance. The primary value for R and X is
calculated from

tan 2.0 ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = (0.1 + 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ) × (1.0 + )×
𝑅/𝑋 ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

or

𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 × 𝑅/𝑋

4.1.13 7ST6

How these devices work:

● Digital protection device with settings R, X, Z and angle α, β und γ

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral (7ST6)

October 2019 135


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

● Combined Tripping Area

Rated currents supported:

● 1 Ampere
● 5 Ampere

1 Ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm], X [Ohm] and Z [Ohm] Angle α [°]
1 0.2 to 600.00 (step 0.01) -70 to 75 (step 0.1)
2 -"- -"-
3 -"- -"-
4 -"- -"-
5 -"- -"-
6 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

5 Ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm], X [Ohm] and Z [Ohm] Angle α [°]
1 0.04 to 120.00 (step 0.01) -70 to 75 (step 0.1)
2 -"- -"-
3 -"- -"-
4 -"- -"-
5 -"- -"-
6 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

The angles β and γ are taken from the directional element data.

The tripping area is an impedance polygon or a combined tripping area.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

The setting values R, X and α are used to determine the area for the impedance polygon
measuring type. The angles of the direction element are used as values for β and γ.

136 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

The setting values R, X and α are used to determine the area for the combined tripping area
measuring type.

4.1.14 EPAC3100, EPAC3400, EPAC3500, EPAC3600 and EPAC3700

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R and X

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm]
1 0.01 to 200.00 (step of 0.01) 0.01 to 200.00 (step of 0.01)
2 -"- -"-
3 -"- -"-
4 -"- -"-
5 -"- -"-
6 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm]
1 0.02 to 40.00 (step of 0.01) 0.02 to 40.00 (step of 0.01)
2 -"- -"-
3 -"- -"-
4 -"- -"-
5 -"- -"-
6 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

The tripping area is a rectangular impedance quadrilateral.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

October 2019 137


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

4.1.15 GRL100

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R, Z and angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral
● MHO Circle

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.5 to 100.0 (step of 0.1) 0.1 to 250.0 (step of 0,01) 45 to 90 (step of 1)
2 -"- -"- such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.01 to 20.00 (step of 0.01) 0.01 to 50.00 (step of 0.01) 45 to 90 (step of 1)
2 -"- -"- such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral or an MHO circle.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R, X and Z is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

138 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

or

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

The setting values R and Z are used to determine the area for the measuring type Impedance
Quadrilateral.

R 75°

The zones 1, 2 and 3 always have the forward direction. The impedance polygon in the 2 nd and 4th
quadrants is limited by the straight lines of the direction element.

-R

R
75° 75° R

Zone 4 always has the backward direction. It has a fixed value for Z in the opposite direction.

The setting values R, Z and angle  are used to determine the area for the measuring type MHO
Circle.

With this measuring type, zones 1 and 2 have a combined area of impedance polygon and MHO
circle.

 R 75°

The MHO circle of zone 3 is limited by blinders and the straight lines of the direction element.

October 2019 139


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

-R R

75°  75° R

The MHO circle of zone 4 is limited by blinders.

4.1.16 LZ91 and LZ92

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings M, N and R/X

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

Zone M [1] N [1] R/X [1] Angle  [°]


1 0.1, 0.5 or 5.0 1.0 to 99.0 (step of 1.0) 1.0 to 5.0 (step of 1.0) 85
2 0.1, 1.0 or 10.0 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral with sides that are always inclined
by 5 degrees.

Procedural Simulation

Note that resistors must have the X value on the secondary side.

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
1.0

140 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

𝑀 × 100 × (1.0 + tan 5.0) × ü𝑉


𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 =
𝑁 × 𝑅/𝑋 × ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

or

𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 × 𝑅/𝑋

4.1.17 MiCOM P43x

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R, X, Z, angle  and angle α

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Circle
● Impedance Quadrilateral
● Impedance Circle with Arc Compensation

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Angle α [°] Angle α [°]
Zone R and X [Ohm] Z [Ohm] Angle  [°] impedance arc
quadrilateral compensation
1 0.1 to 200.00 (step of 0.05 to 200.00 (step of 40.0 to 90.0 -20.0 to 20.0 40.0 to 90.0
0.01) 0.01) (step (step of 1.0) (step of 1.0)
of 1.0)
2 -"- -"- such as 1 such as α1 such as α1
3 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
6 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Angle α [°] Angle α [°]
Zone R and X [Ohm] Z [Ohm] Angle  [°] impedance arc
quadrilateral compensation
1 0.02 to 40.00 (step of 0.01 to 40.00 (step of 40.0 to 90.0 -20.0 to 20.0 40.0 to 90.0
0.01) 0.01) (step of (step of 1.0) (step of 1.0)
1.0)
2 -"- -"- such as 1 such as α1 such as α1
3 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
6 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-

October 2019 141


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

IP -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-


PP -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-

The tripping area is an impedance circle, an impedance quadrilateral or an impedance circle with
arc flash compensation.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

The setting value Z is used as the radius of the impedance circle for the impedance circle
measurement type.

The setting values Z and angle α (arc flash compensation) are used to determine the polygon area
for the impedance circle measurement type with arc flash compensation.

The setting values R, X, angle  and angle α (impedance quadrilateral) are used to determine
polygonal area for the impedance quadrilateral measurement type.

4.1.18 MiCOM P44x

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R, Z and 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance and Blinder


● MHO Circle

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.01 to 400.00 (step of 0.01) 0.001 to 500.00 (step of 0.001) 20.0 to 90.0
(step of 1.0)

142 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

2 -"- -"- such as 1


3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.0002 to 80.00 (step of 0.0002) 0.0002 to 100.00 (step of 0.0002) 20.0 to 90.0
(step of 1.0)
2 -"- -"- such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The tripping area is an impedance polygon or a MHO circle.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

The setting value Z is used as the diameter of the impedance circle for the measuring type MHO
circle.

The setting values Z, R and  are used to define the polygonal area for the impedance and blinder
measurement type.

4.1.19 MiCOM P54x

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R, Z,  and α

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance and Blinder


● MHO Circle

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

October 2019 143


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] and Z [Ohm] Angle  [°] Angle α [°]
1 0.05 to 500.00 (step of 0.01) 20.0 to 90.0 -30 to 30 (step of 1)
(step of 1.0)
2 -"- such as 1 -"-
3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] and Z [Ohm] Angle  [°] Angle α [°]
1 0.01 to 100.00 (step of 0.002) 20.0 to 90.0 -30 to 30 (step of 1)
(step of 1.0)
2 -"- such as 1 -"-
3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The tripping area is an impedance polygon or a MHO circle.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

The setting value Z is used as the diameter of the impedance circle for the measuring type MHO
circle.

The setting values Z, R,  and α are used to define polygonal area for the impedance and blinder
measurement type.

4.1.20 PD531 and PD551

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R and X

144 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm]
1 0.10 to 10.00 (step of 0.01) and 0.10 to 10.00 (step of 0.01) and
10.0 to 200.0 (step of 0.1) 10.0 to 200.0 (step of 0.1)
2 -"- -"-
3 -"- -"-
4 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm]
1 0.02 to 10.00 (step of 0.002) and 0.02 to 10.00 (step of 0.002) and
10.0 to 40.0 (step of 0.02) 10.0 to 40.0 (step of 0.02)
2 -"- -"-
3 -"- -"-
4 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

The tripping area is a rectangular impedance quadrilateral.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

4.1.21 PD532 and PD552

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R, X, Z and angle 

October 2019 145


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral
● Impedance Circle

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.10 to 200.00 0.10 to 200.00 0.05 to 200.00 40.0 to 90.00
(step of 0.01) (step of 0.01) (step of 0.01) (step of 1.0)
2 -"- -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"- -"-
6 -"- -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.02 to 40.00 0.02 to 40.00 0.01 to 40.00 40.0 to 90.00
(step of 0.01) (step of 0.01) (step of 0.01) (step of 1.0)
2 -"- -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"- -"-
6 -"- -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"- -"-

The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral (settings R, X and angle ) or an


impedance circle (set at Z).

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R, X and Z is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

146 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

or

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

The setting value Z is used as the diameter of the impedance circle for the measuring type MHO
circle.

The setting values R and X are used to determine the area for the measuring type impedance
polygon.

4.1.22 R1KZ4, R1KZ4A, RK4 and RK4A

How these devices work:

● Analogous protection devices with the setting R and the measurement range c

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Circle
● Modified Impedance Circle
● Conductance Circle

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

Zone R [Ohm] c [1]


1 Resistance chain: 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6 and 3.2 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0 or 10.0
2 Resistance chain: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6 and 3.2 Such as c1
3 Resistance chain: 0.4, 0.8, 1.6 and 3.2 -"-
IP Resistance chain: 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 10.0, 20.0 and 962.7 -"-
PP -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is an impedance circle, a modified impedance circle or a conductance circle.

Procedural Simulation

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
5.0

October 2019 147


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Resistance chains of the individual zones have a serial connection with a base resistance of
1 ohm. PSS SINCAL automatically adds the base resistance to the indicated settings. When these
settings are passed on in protection device configuration, you need to be very careful that the
values are not reduced a second time by the base resistance. Set the diameter of the circle of the
respective measurement type. The primary value for R is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅1𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × (1 + 𝑅1𝑠𝑒𝑐 ) ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

or

ü𝑉
𝑅2𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × (1 + 𝑅1𝑠𝑒𝑐 + 𝑅2𝑠𝑒𝑐 ) ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

or

ü𝑉
𝑅3𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × (1 + 𝑅1𝑠𝑒𝑐 + 𝑅2𝑠𝑒𝑐 + 𝑅3𝑠𝑒𝑐 ) ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

4.1.23 R1KZ7 and R1KZ7G

How these devices work:

● Analogous protection devices with the setting R, the measurement range c and the angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Circle
● Modified Impedance Circle
● Conductance Circle

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

Zone R [Ohm] c [1] Angle  [°]


1 Resistance chain: 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.3, 1.0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1.0 or 0.0, 20.0, 30.0, 40.0, 50.0 or 55.0
2.0, 3.0 and 3.0 2.0
2 Resistance chain: 0.2, 0.4, 0.4, 1.0, 2.0, Such as c1 Such as 1
3.0 and 3.0
3 -"- -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is an impedance circle, a modified impedance circle or a conductance circle.

Procedural Simulation

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
5.0

148 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Resistance chains of the individual zones have a serial connection with a base resistance of
1 ohm. PSS SINCAL automatically adds the base resistance to the indicated settings. When these
settings are passed on in protection device configuration, you need to be very careful that the
values are not reduced a second time by the base resistance. Set the diameter of the circle of the
respective measurement type. The primary value for R is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅1𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × (1 + 𝑅1𝑠𝑒𝑐 ) ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

or

ü𝑉
𝑅2𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × (1 + 𝑅1𝑠𝑒𝑐 + 𝑅2𝑠𝑒𝑐 ) ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

or

ü𝑉
𝑅3𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × (1 + 𝑅1𝑠𝑒𝑐 + 𝑅2𝑠𝑒𝑐 + 𝑅3𝑠𝑒𝑐 ) ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

4.1.24 R1Z25, R1Z25A and R1Z23B

How these devices work:

● Analogous protection devices with the setting R, the measurement range c, the correction
factor C3 and the angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Circle
● Modified Impedance Circle

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

Zone R [Ohm] c [1] Angle  [°]


1 Resistance chain: 0.1, 0.2, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0 or 10.0 60.0, 64.0, 68.0, 71.0, 74.0,
0.4, 0.8, 1.6 and 3.2 76.0, 78.0 or 80.0
2 Resistance chain: 0.4, 0.8, Such as c1 Such as 1
1.6 and 3.2
3 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is either an impedance circle or a modified impedance circle.

October 2019 149


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Procedural Simulation

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
𝐶3

Resistance chains of the individual zones have a serial connection with a base resistance of
1 ohm. PSS SINCAL automatically adds the base resistance to the indicated settings. When these
settings are passed on in protection device configuration, you need to be very careful that the
values are not reduced a second time by the base resistance. Set the diameter of the circle of the
respective measurement type. The primary value for R is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅1𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × (1 + 𝑅1𝑠𝑒𝑐 ) ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

or

ü𝑉
𝑅2𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × (1 + 𝑅1𝑠𝑒𝑐 + 𝑅2𝑠𝑒𝑐 ) ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

or

ü𝑉
𝑅3𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × (1 + 𝑅1𝑠𝑒𝑐 + 𝑅2𝑠𝑒𝑐 + 𝑅3𝑠𝑒𝑐 ) ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

4.1.25 R1Z27

How these devices work:

● Analogous protection device with the setting R, the measurement range c and the angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Circle
● Modified Impedance Circle

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

Zone R [Ohm] c [1] Angle  [°]


1 1.0000 to 2.50000 (step of 0.0001) 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 20.0 or 50.0 60.0, 65.0, 70.0, 75.0 or 80.0
2 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is either an impedance circle or a modified impedance circle.

150 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Procedural Simulation

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
1.0

For each zone, the resistance potentiometer must be assigned continuous values. The
measurement range can be entered individually for each zone. Set the diameter of the circle of the
respective measurement type. The primary value for R is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

4.1.26 RD10

How these devices work:

● Analogous protection device with the setting R and the measurement range c

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Circle

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] c [1]
1 0.25000 to 6.25000 (step of 0.00001) 1.0, 4.0 or 8.0
2 -"- Such as c1
3 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] c [1]
1 0.05000 to 1.25000 (step of 0.00001) 1.0, 4.0 or 8.0
2 -"- Such as c1
3 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

The tripping area is an impedance circle.

October 2019 151


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Procedural Simulation

For each zone, the resistance potentiometer must be assigned continuous values. The primary
value for R is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

4.1.27 RED670

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R, RF, X, Z and angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral
● MHO Circle
● MHO Circle polarized

Rated currents supported:

● 1 to 10 ampere

1 to 10 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] RF [Ohm] Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.10 to 1000.00 (step 0.10 to 3000.00 (step 1.0 to 3000.00 (step 0.005 to 3000 (step 40 to 90 (step
of 0.01) of 0.01) of 0.01) of 0.001) of 1)
2 0.01 to 3000.00 (step 0.5 to 3000.00 -"- -"- such as 1
of 0.01) (step of 0.01)
3 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"- -"- -"-

The tripping area is a impedance quadrilateral Form B or an MHO circle.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

ü𝑉
𝑅𝐹𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝐹𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

152 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

The setting values R and X do not directly determine the limitation of the tripping area.

Area for Phase Tripping:

2R RF

2X

RF

Area for Ground Tripping:

R x (1 + Re/Rl)
RF

X x (1 + Xe/Xl)

RF

4.1.28 REF630

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R, Rmin, Rmax, X, Z, Rev, angle α and 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral
● MHO Circle
● MHO Circle polarized
● Reactance Quadrilateral
● Combined Tripping Area

October 2019 153


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Rated currents supported:

● 1 to 5 ampere

1 to 5 ampere rated current


Zone R, X, Z and Rev [Ohm] Rmin and Rmax [Ohm] Angle α [°] Angle  [°]
1 0.01 to 3000.00 0.01 to 500.00 -45 to 45 15 to 90
(step of 0.01) (step of 0.01) (step of 1) (step of 1)
2 -"- -"- -"- -"-
3 -"- -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"- -"-

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑒𝑣𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑒𝑣𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

Reactance Quadrilateral Measurement Type

Area for Phase Tripping:

for Z = 0: for Z ≠ 0:

X X Z


R R
Rev

Rev

154 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Area for Ground Tripping:

for Z = 0: for Z ≠ 0:

X x (1 + Xe/Xl) X
Zxk


R x (1 + Re/Rl) R

Rev x (1 + Xe/Xl) Rev x k

MHO Circle Measurement Type

Area for Phase Tripping:

for Z = 0: for Z ≠ 0:

R 

Rev

Rev

Area for Ground Tripping:

for Z = 0: for Z ≠ 0:

Zxk

X x (1 + Xe/Xl)

R x (1 + Re/Rl) 

Rev x (1 + Xe/Xl)

Rev x k

October 2019 155


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Impedance Quadrilateral Measurement Type

Area for Phase Tripping:

for Z = 0: for Z ≠ 0:

Rmin X Rmax Rmin Rmax


 Z 

 
R
Rev Rmin Rev Rmin
 
Rmin Rmin

Area for Ground Tripping:

for Z = 0: for Z ≠ 0:

Rmin X x (1 + Xe/Xl) Rmax Rmin Rmax


 
Zxk

 
R x (1 + Re/Rl)
Rev x k Rmin
Rmin
 
Rmin Rev x (1 + Xe/Xl) Rmin

Combined Tripping Area Measurement Type

In the second and fourth quadrant, the area is limited by the angle range of the directional element.

156 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Area for Phase Tripping:

for Z = 0: for Z ≠ 0:

X Rmax X Rmax
 Z 

 
R R
Rev Rev

Rmin Rmin

Area for Ground Tripping:

for Z = 0: for Z ≠ 0:

X x (1 + Xe/Xl) Rmax X Zxk Rmax


 

 
R x (1 + Re/Rl) R
Rev x (1 + Xe/Xl) Rev x k

Rmin Rmin

4.1.29 REL316

How these devices work:

● Digital protection device with settings R and X

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 2 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 or 2 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm]
1 0.01 to 300.00 (step of 0.01) 0.01 to 300.00 (step of 0.01)

October 2019 157


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

2 -"- -"-
3 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm]
1 0.001 to 30.000 (step of 0.001) 0.001 to 30.000 (step of 0.001)
2 -"- -"-
3 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

The tripping area is a rectangular impedance quadrilateral.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

4.1.30 REL511, REL521 and REL561

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R and X and X and angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.10 to 400.00 (step of 0.01) 0.10 to 400.00 (step of 0.01) Free input
2 -"- -"- -"-
3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-

158 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

PP -"- -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.02 to 80.00 (step of 0.01) 0.02 to 80.00 (step of 0.01) Free input
2 -"- -"- -"-
3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
5 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The tripping area is a rectangular impedance quadrilateral.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R and X is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

The R setting values are halved with phase-phase loops for the impedance quadrilateral
measurement type.

𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 =
2

4.1.31 SD124

How these devices work:

● Analogous protection device with the setting R, the measurement range c and the angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Circle
● Modified Impedance Circle

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] c [1] Angle  [°]
1 1.00000 to 28.00000 (step of 0.00001) 0.25, 1.00 or 2.00 10.00 to 90.00 (step of 0.01)

October 2019 159


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

2 -"- Such as c1 Such as 1


3 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] c [1] Angle  [°]
1 0.20000 to 5.60000 (step of 0.00001) 0.25, 1.00 or 2.00 10.00 to 90.00 (step of 0.01)
2 -"- Such as c1 Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The tripping area is either an impedance circle or a modified impedance circle.

Procedural Simulation

For each zone, the resistance potentiometer must be assigned continuous values. Set the radius of
the circle of the respective measurement type. The primary value for R is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

With the mixed impedance circle measuring type, the distance to the coordinate origin is calculated
as follows:

√0.1025
∆𝑅 = 𝑅 ×
1.05

4.1.32 SD135

How these devices work:

● Digital protection device with the setting R, the measurement range c and the angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] c [1] Angle  [°]
1 1.00000 to 10.00000 (step of 0.00001) 0.1, 1.0 and 6.0 72
2 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
IP 1.20, 1.35 or 1.50 Such as c1 -"-

160 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

PP -"- -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] c [1] Angle  [°]
1 1.00000 to 10.00000 (step of 0.00001) 0.02, 0.20 and 1.20 72
2 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
IP 1.20, 1.35 or 1.50 Such as c1 -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral.

Procedural Simulation

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
1.0

PSS SINCAL calculates the primary value for R and X from the setting Z and the angle /2.

ü𝑉 𝜑
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 × × sin
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 2

or

ü𝑉 𝜑
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 × × cos − 𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 × tan 𝜑
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 2

4.1.33 SD135A

How these devices work:

● Digital protection device with the setting R, the measurement range c and the angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

Zone Z [Ohm] c [1] Angle  [°]


1 1.00000 to 10.00000 (step of 0.00001) 0.1, 1.0 and 10.0 72
2 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
IP 1.20, 1.35, 1.50, 2.00 or 3.00 Such as c1 -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

October 2019 161


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral.

Procedural Simulation

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
1.0

PSS SINCAL calculates the primary value for R and X from the setting Z and the angle /2.

ü𝑉 𝜑
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 × × sin
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 2

or

ü𝑉 𝜑
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 × × cos − 𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 × tan 𝜑
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 2

4.1.34 SD14, SD14A and SD14B

How these devices work:

● Analogous protection devices with the setting R and the measurement range c

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Circle

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] c [1]
1 0.50000 to 12.50000 (step of 0.00001) 0.5, 1.0 or 4.0
2 -"- Such as c1
3 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] c [1]
1 0.10000 to 2.50000 (step of 0.00001) 0.5, 1.0 or 4.0
2 -"- Such as c1
3 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

162 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

The tripping area is an impedance circle.

Procedural Simulation

For each zone, the resistance potentiometer must be assigned continuous values. Set the radius of
the circle of the respective measurement type. The primary value for R is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

4.1.35 SD34A

How these devices work:

● Analogous protection device with the setting R, the measurement range c and the angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Circle

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] c [1] Angle  [°]
1 0.50000 to 13.0000 (step of 0.00001) 0.5, 1.0 or 4.0 10.0000 to 87.0000 (step of 0.0001)
2 -"- Such as c1 Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] c [1] Angle  [°]
1 0.10000 to 2.6000 (step of 0.00001) 0.5, 1.0 or 4.0 10.0000 to 87.0000 (step of 0.0001)
2 -"- Such as c1 Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The tripping area is an impedance circle.

October 2019 163


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Procedural Simulation

For each zone, the resistance potentiometer must be assigned continuous values. Set the radius of
the circle of the respective measurement type. The primary value for R is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

4.1.36 SD35

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with the setting Z, the measurement range c and the angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

Zone Z [Ohm] c [1] Angle  [°]


1 1.00000 to 10.00000 (step of 0.00001) 0.1, 1.0 and 6.0 90
2 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
IP 1.20, 1.35 or 1.50 Such as c1 -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral.

Procedural Simulation

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
1.0

PSS SINCAL calculates the primary value for R and X from the setting Z and the angle /2.

ü𝑉 𝜑
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 × × sin
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 2

or

ü𝑉 𝜑
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 × × cos
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 2

164 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

4.1.37 SD35A and SD35C

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with the setting Z, the measurement range c and the angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

Zone Z [Ohm] c [1] Angle  [°]


1 1.00000 to 10.00000 (step of 0.00001) 0.1, 1.0 and 10.0 90
2 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
IP 1.20, 1.35 or 1.50 Such as c1 -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral.

Procedural Simulation

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
1.0

PSS SINCAL calculates the primary value for R and X from the setting Z and the angle /2.

ü𝑉 𝜑
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 × × sin
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 2

or

ü𝑉 𝜑
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑐 × 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 × × cos
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 2

4.1.38 SD36

How these devices work:

● Analogous protection device with the setting R and the angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Circle

October 2019 165


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

Zone R [Ohm] Angle  [°]


1 0.10000 to 99.99000 (step of 0.00001) 10.00 to 87.00 (step of 0.01)
2 -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

The setting range is true for devices with 1A rated current and for devices with 5A rated current.
The tripping area is an impedance circle.

Procedural Simulation

PSS SINCAL determines an internal transformer factor using the rated current with

𝐼𝑛
ü𝑖𝑛𝑡 =
1.0

For each zone, the resistance potentiometer must be assigned continuous values. Set the radius of
the circle of the respective measurement type. The primary value for R is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼 × ü𝑖𝑛𝑡

4.1.39 SEL311A

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings Z and angle 

Measurement types supported:

● MHO Circle
● MHO Circle Polarized

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.25 to 320.00 (step of 0.01) 40 to 90 (step of 1)
2 -"- Such as 1
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

166 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

5 ampere rated current


Zone Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.05 to 64.00 (step of 0.01) 40 to 90 (step of 1)
2 -"- Such as 1
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

The tripping area is a MHO circle or a MHO circle polarized.

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for Z is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

4.1.40 SEL311B

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings Z and angle 

Measurement types supported:

● MHO Circle
● MHO Circle Polarized

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.25 to 320.00 (step of 0.01) 40 to 90 (step of 1)
2 -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.05 to 64.00 (step of 0.01) 40 to 90 (step of 1)
2 -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"-
IP -"- -"-
PP -"- -"-

The tripping area is a MHO circle or a MHO circle polarized.

October 2019 167


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for Z is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

4.1.41 SEL311C1, SEL311C2, SEL311C3 and SEL321

How these devices work:

● Digital protection devices with settings R, X, Z and angle 

Measurement types supported:

● Impedance Quadrilateral (only ground tripping)


● MHO Circle (phase and ground tripping)
● MHO Circle Polarized (phase and ground tripping)

Rated currents supported:

● 1 ampere
● 5 ampere

1 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] and Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.25 to 250.00 (step of 0.01) 0.25 to 320.00 (step of 0.01) 40 to 90 (step of 1)
2 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

5 ampere rated current


Zone R [Ohm] X [Ohm] and Z [Ohm] Angle  [°]
1 0.05 to 50.00 (step of 0.01) 0.05 to 64.00 (step of 0.01) 40 to 90 (step of 1)
2 -"- -"- Such as 1
3 -"- -"- -"-
4 -"- -"- -"-
IP -"- -"- -"-
PP -"- -"- -"-

The tripping area is a diamond-shaped impedance quadrilateral, a MHO circle or a MHO circle
polarized.

168 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Procedural Simulation

The primary value for R, X and Z is calculated from

ü𝑉
𝑅𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑅𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑋𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

or

ü𝑉
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑖 = 𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐 ×
ü𝐼

4.2 Calculation Method


The task of this simulation procedure is to determine the settings for distance protection devices.
PSS SINCAL first uses the protection devices and protection device types in the network to
calculate minimum primary network impedance using a solution strategy.

Since there are different concepts or philosophies for determining primary network impedance for
protection devices, these are implemented as solution strategies in the simulation procedure.

Currently PSS SINCAL can use the following solution strategies to determine primary network
impedance for forward and non-directional tripping zones:

● DISTAL Strategy:
This strategy is based on DISTAL. The distance protection devices are set according to
absolute selectivity.
● Line Impedance Strategy:
This strategy determines the impedance areas of protection devices and their settings from the
sum of the line impedances in the protection zones.
● Line Impedance Strategy Connected:
This strategy determines the settings for protection devices from line impedances in the
network.
● Medium-Voltage Network Strategy:
This strategy determines the impedance areas of protection devices and their settings from
loop impedances in the protection zones.

There are currently no solution strategies for determining the primary network impedance for
reverse tripping zones.

The settings for the tripping zones are determined separately for forward and reverse directions. All
forward and non-directional tripping zones, as well as the auto-reclosure and the comparison
protection, are used to determine the settings for the forward direction. All reverse tripping zones
are used to determine the settings for the reverse direction.

October 2019 169


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

The zone name in the settings calculation can therefore be different to the zone name shown in the
input screen form. Depending on the current direction (forward or reverse), the first zone in the
settings calculation is the first forward or non-directional active tripping zone or the first reverse
active tripping zone. The same applies to the second, third, fourth, fifth and sixth zone in the
settings calculation. Depending on the entry in the input screen form, either no tripping zone or up
to six can be used in the current direction of the settings calculation.

PSS SINCAL uses time sequence factors to calculate the primary boundary impedance from the
primary network impedance. The primary boundary impedance can also be entered directly by the
user.

PSS SINCAL uses transformers, protection device types and the primary boundary impedance in
the network to calculate the secondary values actually set at the protection devices. PSS SINCAL
always rounds off the settings to the next possible lower setting.

Protection route simulation is a way to determine whether the tripping behavior you want can
actually be achieved with the settings that have been calculated.

All strategies that determine tripping times are identical to calculating impedance. PSS SINCAL
uses preferred tripping times, tripping distance and the tripping times of the subordinate protection
devices to calculate tripping time.

4.2.1 Entries for Determining Impedance

Entries in Calculation Settings, Network Levels and protection device data define how
PSS SINCAL calculates primary network impedance data.

Defining with Protection Device Data

Selective Grading Factor for Forward or Non-Directional Tripping Zones

If the selective grading factor – zone 2 is greater than 100 percent, PSS SINCAL uses the
primary network impedance from Zone 1.

If the selective grading factor – zone 3 is greater than 100 percent, PSS SINCAL uses the
maximum primary network impedance from Zone 2.

If the directional final time of the protection device is smaller than or equal to the tripping time of a
particular zone, PSS SINCAL uses the primary network impedance of the previous zone. This entry
has higher priority than the entry for selective tripping factors.

Setting same as Previous Tripping Zone

The primary network impedance of the previous zone is used. This setting option is therefore only
available from the second zone onwards.

Boundary Impedance of the Tripping Zone

The set boundary impedance is used to calculate the settings.

170 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

General Definitions

PSS SINCAL uses the smallest impedance up to the location of the next protection device as the
primary network impedance from Zone 1. If the time difference between the tripping zone of the
current protection device and that of the following protection device is greater than the minimum
selective tripping, PSS SINCAL calculates the selective tripping factor for this zone. This means
that this zone has an effect that goes beyond the next protection device.

OC protection devices at a transformer limit the protection zone. PSS SINCAL does not, however,
use the impedance up to this network point to determine the smallest impedance from Zone 1.

PSS SINCAL uses the small impedance up to the boundary of Zone 1 or Zone 2 from the next
protection device as the primary network impedance for Zone 2 or Zone 3, if the boundary is
located in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

The smallest primary network impedance of the third zone is used as the primary network
impedance of the fourth zone.

The largest primary network impedance of the third zone is used as the primary network
impedance of the fifth and sixth zone.

If the boundary impedance of the second, third, fourth or sixth level is less than that of the
preceding level, PSS SINCAL uses the impedance of the preceding level to calculate the settings.

If the tripping time of a level is less than or equal to the tripping time for directional current
energizing, PSS SINCAL sets the level equal to the prior level.

Defining with Calculation Settings

Protection Settings – Calculation Settings determine the:

● Strategy used to calculate primary network impedance


● Shortest distance of the second protection zone
● Calculation sequence for the tripping zones
● Additional information used to calculate primary network impedance
● Delay times

Treatment of Transformers

The attribute for Treatment of Transformers in the calculation settings for Protection Settings
influences for two-winding full transformers the protection zone in calculations for primary network
impedance. PSS SINCAL provides the following options:

● Consider transformers
● Ignore radial transformers
● Ignore transformers

October 2019 171


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

In the network topology below the first protection device depends on the consideration of
transformers.

With Consider transformers, all network elements remain in the protection zone.

Ignore radial transformers ignores all transformers at the end of a radial network if there is no
supply source.

Ignore transformers ignores all transformers.

172 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Treatment of Supply Nodes

The attribute for Treatment of Supply Nodes in the calculation settings for Protection Settings
influences the protection zone in calculations for primary network impedance. PSS SINCAL
provides the following options:

● None
● Slack node
● Slack node and transformer
● Slack and transformer opposite node

In the network topology below the first protection device depends on the treatment of supply nodes.

Without special treatment all network elements remain in the protection zone. The protection
device in the parallel feed limits the protection zone. The protection device is graded according to
what has been entered for the individual zones.

When a slack node limits the protection zone, the protection zone ends at this node. The
remaining network area is a radial network. The protection device is graded according to what has
been entered for radial lines.

October 2019 173


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Since the supply source is attached directly at the network, any further setting possibilities will
create the same protection zone as if limited by the slack node. There needs to be a feed by a
transformer to have additional possibilities.

When slack node and transformer limit the protection zone, the protection zone ends at these
nodes or elements. The protection zone ends behind the transformer or at the protection device at
the parallel feeder. The protection device is graded according to what has been entered for
individual zones.

When the slack and transformer opposite node limits the protection zone, the protection zone
ends at these nodes or elements. The remaining network area is a radial network. The protection
device is graded according to what has been entered for radial lines.

Delay Times

PSS SINCAL uses delay times as preferential tripping times, if the tripping time of the level is 0.0
seconds and the tripping distance is kept.

174 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

If the tripping distance is greater than the tripping time entered in the minimum delay times, the
tripping time of the second level is set to the desired tripping time.

tv2
t12 = tv2
ts

tv1
t11 t21

Z
Z1 Z2

If the tripping distance is smaller than the tripping time entered in the minimum delay times, the
time of the second level is set to the tripping time of the first level of the following protection device
plus the minimum tripping time. The tripping time of the second level must be more than the
desired tripping time.

t12 = t21 + ts
tv2
ts

tv1
t11 t21

Z
Z1 Z2

Defining with Network Level Data

The network level defines the arcing reserve for individual voltage levels and for individual
measurement types. Depending on what has been entered, PSS SINCAL calculates the arcing
reserve before it determines the settings for boundary impedance.

Factor R from X

𝑍𝑘𝑆𝑒𝑡 = 𝑅𝑘 + 𝑓𝑅 × 𝑎𝑏𝑠(𝑋𝑘 ) + 𝑗𝑋𝑘

R Arc (primary)

𝑍𝑘𝑆𝑒𝑡 = 𝑅𝑘 + 𝑅𝑎𝑟𝑐 + 𝑗𝑋𝑘

Minimum R/X

for Rk/jXk < Minimum R/X:

𝑍𝑘𝑆𝑒𝑡 = 𝑋𝑘 + 𝑅/𝑋 + 𝑗𝑋𝑘

October 2019 175


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

for Rk/jXk ≥ Minimum R/X:

𝑍𝑘𝑆𝑒𝑡 = 𝑅𝑘 + 𝑗𝑋𝑘

ZkSet … Boundary impedance to determine setting


Rk … Boundary resistance according to strategy
Xk … Boundary reactance according to strategy
Rarc … Arcing resistance
R/X … Minimum value for R/X ratio
fR … Factor for resistance

4.2.2 Type of Measurement

This is the impedance area (R/X) that can be set at the protection device. Depending on the type of
distance protection device, PSS SINCAL supports different types of measurement – and thus
impedance areas.

Older protection devices work in the same way and have a circular tripping area. Newer protection
devices work digitally and can recreate both a circular-shaped tripping area and a quadrilateral-
shaped tripping area.

PSS SINCAL provides the following types of measurement and impedance areas.

● Analogous Impedance Measurement – Impedance Circle


● Analogous Measurement of Mixed Impedance – Modified Impedance Circle
● Analogous Conductance Measurement – Conductance Circle
● Digital Quadrilateral – Impedance Quadrilateral (with/without Entering R/X > 1)
● Digital Reactance Measurement – Reactance Quadrilateral
● Digital MHO – MHO Circle
● Digital MHO Polarized – MHO Circle Polarized
● Digital MHO – MHO Limited
● Digital MHO – MHO Limited and Polarized
● Digital – Combined Tripping Area
● Digital – Impedance and Blinder
● Digital – Impedance Circle with Arc Compensation

When it calculates settings for distance protection devices, PSS SINCAL constructs simplified
areas from boundary impedance and then uses the available settings to construct an area as
similar to this as possible at the protection devices themselves.

Summary of important formulas for calculating the settings:

Formula sign Description


R Resistance
X Reactance
Z = √𝑅 2 + 𝑋 2 Impedance

176 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

1 𝑋2
= 𝑍𝑘 = R + Conductance (reciprocal conductance calculated as resistance)
𝐺 𝑅
c Measurement range

Impedance Circle

Impedance circles have their center at the origin of the coordinate of the R/X level.

As the smallest primary network impedance, PSS SINCAL uses the one producing the smallest the
smallest absolute value.

2 ü𝐼
𝑟= × √𝑅 2 + 𝑋 2
𝑐 ü𝑉

or

2𝑍𝑠𝑒𝑐
𝑟=
𝑐

Modified Impedance Circle

Modified impedance circles have their diameter on the R axis in the R/X level and passing through
the x-axis at the boundary reactance.

As the smallest primary network impedance, PSS SINCAL uses the one producing the smallest
absolute value.

2 ü𝐼
𝑟= × × 1.05𝑋
𝑐 ü𝑉

or

2.1𝑋𝑠𝑒𝑐
𝑟=
𝑐

October 2019 177


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Conductance Circle

Conductance circles have their diameter on the R axis in the R/X level and touching the x-axis.

As the smallest primary network impedance, PSS SINCAL uses the one producing the smallest
conductance circle.

PSS SINCAL determines the radius of the conductance circle as follows:

1 ü𝐼 𝑋2
𝑟= × (𝑅 + )
𝑐 ü𝑉 𝑅

or

𝑍𝑘𝑠𝑒𝑐
𝑟=
𝑐

Impedance Quadrilateral

This describes the impedance area with a quadrilateral. Entering the angle  changes the incline of
the R/X area.

When PSS SINCAL determines the setting. it sees the impedance quadrilateral as a simplified
rectangle. If it can have an incline, PSS SINCAL uses the angle of the boundary impedance of the
first level as the setting for the angle .

178 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

As the smallest primary network impedance, PSS SINCAL uses the one producing the smallest
reactance value. The resistance value used depends on the impedance determination. The
standard method uses the resistance belonging to the reactance value plus the arc resistance. The
reactance method only uses the arc resistance.

X
Z


R

Impedance Quadrilateral Standard

In the first zone, entering an angle  can distort the polygon.

X

 
R

Impedance Quadrilateral Form A

With some protection devices the impedance polygon also has the following form:

α
β

R
γ

The impedance area is defined by specifying the angles α, β and γ as well as R and X. The angles
β and γ are taken from the directional element data. The angle α is determined by means of the
angle (φ) of the boundary impedance.

October 2019 179


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Impedance Polygon Form B

With some protection devices the impedance polygon also has the following form:

 
R

Reactance Quadrilateral

The reactance quadrilateral is a rectangle in the R/X level that has a prescribed X Value. The R
direction has no limit. The largest value becomes the R value. PSS SINCAL automatically adjusts
the reactance quadrilateral during protection simulation.

As the smallest primary network impedance, PSS SINCAL uses the one producing the smallest
reactance value.

MHO Circle

MHO circles pass through the origin of the coordinate and have their diameter on the straight line.
PSS SINCAL uses the angle of the boundary impedance of the first level as the angle of the
straight line.

As the smallest primary network impedance, PSS SINCAL uses the one producing the smallest
MHO circle with the straight line. The resistance value used depends on the impedance
determination. The standard method uses the resistance belonging to the reactance value plus the
arc resistance. The reactance method only uses the arc resistance.

To calculate the MHO circle from impedance with R and X, a straight line, normally at the
impedance indicator, has to pass through the point R/X in the R/X level. The intersecting point
becomes the diameter of the MHO circle.

180 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

MHO Circle – Forward

X
Z

MHO Circle – Backward

MHO Circle Polarized

The polarized MHO circle is a circle based on the MHO circle. The polarization increases or
decreases the circle in the direction opposite to the fault.

PSS SINCAL always uses the pre-fault voltage to calculate polarization voltage according to
following formula:

𝑉𝑝 = (1.0 − 𝑘𝑝𝑟𝑒 ) × 𝑉𝑎𝑐𝑡 + 𝑘𝑝𝑟𝑒 × 𝑉𝑝𝑟𝑒

Vp … Polarization voltage
kpre … Setting for evaluation factor for pre-fault polarization
Vact … Current voltage of the impedance loop
Vpre … Pre-fault voltage of the impedance loop

The setting for the evaluation factor for pre-fault polarization is for all levels. PSS SINCAL
calculates any change in impedance from the polarization voltage and the current as follows:

𝑉𝑝
𝑍𝑝𝑟𝑒 =
𝐼𝑎𝑐𝑡

Vp … Polarization voltage
Iact … Present current of the impedance loop
Zpre … Change in impedance at pre-fault voltage polarization

October 2019 181


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

As the smallest primary network impedance, PSS SINCAL uses the one producing the smallest
unpolarized MHO circle with the straight line.

To calculate the unpolarized MHO circle from impedance with R and X, a straight line that is
normally to the impedance indicator has to pass through the point R/X in the R/X level. The
intersecting point becomes the diameter of the MHO circuit.

MHO Circle – Forward – Forward Fault

R
Zpre

MHO Circle – Forward – Backward Fault

Zpre

MHO Limited

The limited MHO tripping area is an MHO circle that is limited horizontally and vertically in the first
quadrant in definition point Z (setting value Z and angle of the conductor straight lines).

As the smallest primary network impedance, PSS SINCAL uses the one producing the smallest
MHO circle with the straight line.

182 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

MHO Limited – Forward

X
Z

MHO Limited – Backward

MHO Limited and Polarized

The polarization is carried in the same way as for MHO Circle polarized with an impedance shift
Zvor.

As the smallest primary network impedance, PSS SINCAL uses the one producing the smallest
unpolarized MHO circle with the straight line.

MHO Limited and Polarized – Forward – Fault in Forward Direction

X
Z

R
Zvor

October 2019 183


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

MHO Limited and Polarized – Forward – Fault in Backward Direction

X
Z

Zvor

Combined Tripping Area

With this measuring type the impedance area is described with straight lines and a circle. The
impedance area is defined by specifying the angles α, β and γ as well as R and Z.

In the setting value calculation, the combined tripping area is seen in simplified form as a circle.
The angles β and γ are taken from the directional element data. The angle α is determined by
means of the angle (φ) of the boundary impedance.

The impedance value supplying the smallest impedance value is used as the smallest primary
network impedance.

α
β

R
γ

Impedance and Blinder

This describes the impedance area with a quadrilateral. Entering the angle  changes the incline of
the R/X area.

When PSS SINCAL determines the setting. it sees the impedance quadrilateral as a simplified
rectangle. If it can have an incline, PSS SINCAL uses the angle of the boundary impedance of the
first level as the setting for the angle .

184 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

As the smallest primary network impedance, PSS SINCAL uses the one producing the smallest
reactance value.

X
Z

  
R

With some protection devices the impedance polygon also has the following form:

Z

-R  R
R

-3°
-Z

Impedance Circle with Arc Compenstation

With this measuring type the impedance area is described with a circle. In order to better detect arc
faults, the area is extended by specifying the angle α at this angle using the differential angle .

In the setting value calculation, the impedance with arc compensation is seen in simplified form as
a circle.

As the smallest primary network impedance, PSS SINCAL uses the one producing the smallest
impedance value.


Z
Zcomp

October 2019 185


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

|𝑍𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝 | = |𝑍| × (1 + sin 𝛿)

4.2.3 Selective Grading Factors

Impedance characteristics are set in the protection device depending on circuit breaker locations
and their selective protection zones in the network. Tripping is initiated if the measured impedance
is within the set characteristic and after the corresponding delay time has elapsed.

Tripping diagrams with impedance-time characteristics provide a good method to visualize


protection device settings.

The selective grading factors determine the reach of the protection zones, based on a percentage
value of the line impedance.

ZR3
ZR2
ZR1

ZL1 ZL2 ZL3

ZR1'
ZR2'

If the first, second and third zone no longer have any subordinate protection device, PSS SINCAL
replaces the grading factor of the zone (st1, st2, and st3) with the grading factor for stub cables
(stStich).

Zone 1

𝑠𝑡1
𝑍𝑅1 = × 𝑍𝐿1
100

Zone 2

𝑠𝑡1 𝑠𝑡2
𝑍𝑅2 = (𝑍𝐿1 + 𝑍𝐿2 × )×
100 100

Zone 3

𝑠𝑡1 𝑠𝑡2 𝑠𝑡3


𝑍𝑅3 = (𝑍𝐿1 + (𝑍𝐿2 + 𝑍𝐿3 × )× )×
100 100 100

Zone 4

𝑠𝑡4
𝑍𝑅4 = 𝑍𝑅3𝑚𝑖𝑛 ×
100

186 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Zone 5

𝑠𝑡5
𝑍𝑅5 = 𝑍𝑅3𝑚𝑎𝑥 ×
100

Zone 6

𝑠𝑡6
𝑍𝑅6 = 𝑍𝑅3𝑚𝑎𝑥 ×
100

Auto-Reclosure

𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑟
𝑍𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑟 = 𝑍𝐿1 ×
100

Teleprotection

𝑠𝑡𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝
𝑍𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝 = 𝑍𝐿1 ×
100

Recommended Selective Grading Factors

𝑠𝑡1 = 𝑠𝑡2 = 𝑠𝑡3 = 90 %

𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑟 = 𝑠𝑡𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝 = 120 %

Zones of the Next Protection Device

𝑠𝑡1
𝑍𝑅1′ = 𝑍𝐿2 ×
100
𝑠𝑡1 𝑠𝑡2
𝑍𝑅2′ = (𝑍𝐿2 + 𝑍𝐿3 × )×
100 100

4.2.4 DISTAL Strategy

The DISTAL strategy sets the protection devices according to absolute selectivity.

The following are true:

● PSS SINCAL observes all protection devices in the direction of the line.
● Except for the branch with the protection device, all branches leading away from protection
devices are disconnected.
● A generator is created at the protection device location to determine the network impedance of
the protection device.
● The real generators in the network can either be deactivated or considered in the calculations.
● A minimum value of R/X is entered for impedance quadrilaterals to assure there will be no
unfavorable impedance areas (too long and narrow).

October 2019 187


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Types of Protection Zones

Distance protection devices determine the fault impedance from the line voltage and current at the
location.

Protection devices can measure the fault removal correctly only if the line connecting the protection
device to the fault location is an unbranched radial line or if there is a tree with only one supply
source at the location.

Ik
Z4
Z1

Z2 Z3

𝑉
𝑍𝑅 = = 𝑍1 + 𝑍2 + 𝑍3 + 𝑍4
𝐼𝑘

The following illustration shows a protection zone as a tree.

Ik

Z1

Z2
Z3

𝑉
𝑍𝑅 = = 𝑍1 + 𝑍2 + 𝑍3
𝐼𝑘

Each parallel path increases the range of the protection device, and the protection device "sees"
the fault as being closer.

Z1 Z2

ZP

𝑍2 × 𝑍𝑃 𝑍𝑃
𝑍𝑅 = 𝑍1 + = 𝑍1 + 𝑍2 ( )
𝑍2 + 𝑍𝑃 𝑍2 + 𝑍𝑃

188 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Each intermediate supply source (between the protection device and fault location) shortens the
range of the protection device; i.e. the protection device "sees" the fault as being farther away.

~
I1
I2

𝑉 = 𝐼1 × 𝑍1 + (𝐼1 + 𝐼2 ) × 𝑍2

𝑉 𝐼1 + 𝐼2
𝑍𝑅 = = 𝑍1 + × 𝑍2
𝐼1 𝐼1

Normally, a meshed network has several supply sources. The following diagram shows a path in a
meshed network where the range of the protection devices at the beginning of the route is to be
checked:

3 4

1 2

October 2019 189


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Networks can be converted to the form below:

~ ~ ~ ~

1 2 3 4

Normally meshed networks have:

● A supply source with pre-reactance at each substation


● Parallel connections between all substations

All supply sources and parallel connections must be considered to find the exact setting of the
protection device.

This setting is correct only for this basic network condition.

Changing feed ratios or switching lines ON/OFF, however, does change the impedance measured
by the protection device. Particularly when intermediate supply sources are turned OFF, the
protection device measures "too far". This means there is no selective tripping, and the devices are
not turned OFF properly.

To assure selective tripping for all feeding and switching conditions, you need to select the network
condition where the protection device measures farthest. This means the protection device can
only measure distances that are shorter than this and never measures beyond the permissible
selective tripping limit.

Protection devices have maximum range:

● If you have eliminated all intermediate supply sources that might shorten the range (as
explained above)
● If there is a supply source at the protection device
● If you have considered all parallel paths (parallel paths starting from Substation 1 are not
considered since they are an intermediate supply source and NOT a parallel path for the short
circuit current running through the protection device)

190 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

The following is a network diagram that has been converted to determine the settings of Protection
Device 1:

~
ZP1 ZP2
1 2 3 4

ZP3

ZP1, ZP2 and ZP3 are replacement impedances for the entire parallel subnetwork. (Parallel resistors
of the subordinate network level are not considered since relatively high-resistance dead-end
transformers block them).

These tripping resistors guarantee the highest degree of selectivity. Even in worst-case network
switching and feeding scenarios, tripping will be selective (worst case-selective tripping).

Zone 2 must go beyond the remote substation to include busbar faults with arcs. This is particularly
important for busbars that are not protected.

Sequence for Calculating the Tripping Zones

Calculating Zone 1

Zone 1 can be calculated exactly. Since accurate calculations are unnecessary, a selective grading
factor of 90 % is recommended.

Calculating Zone 2

In the next zone, PSS SINCAL first considers all the parallel resistors. Then it checks whether the
zone goes beyond the following substation by a minimum percentage. This percentage can be set
in the Calculation Settings. If Zone 2 does go beyond the next substation by this amount,
PSS SINCAL displays a warning message.

This assures a good compromise between selectivity and tripping. PSS SINCAL prints a log of the
actual range of Zone 2 as a percentage of the line with the protection device. This log should be
checked if PSS SINCAL displays a warning message.

Calculating Zone 3 (Normal with Grading Factor < 100 %)

The Zone 3 checks all the parallel resistors for selectivity. PSS SINCAL automatically shuts down
any line segments that Zone 3 does not reach. Selectivity is emphasized. Very rarely, however, a
protection device or switch can fail in the meshed network, and there can be somewhat longer
tripping times.

October 2019 191


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Calculating Zone 3 (Normal with Grading Factor ≥ 100 %)

The Zone 3 has to reach past the second substation away to avert larger network shutdowns.

ZR3

Z21 Z31

Z22 Z32

Z23

𝑍𝑅3 = (𝑍1 + 𝑍2 𝑚𝑎𝑥 ) × 𝑠𝑡3

Here some additional lines can be turned OFF to prevent a larger network shutdown.

Calculating Zone 3 like Zone 2

The same impedance setting should be used for the Zone 2 and Zone 3.

4.2.5 Line Impedance Strategy

PSS SINCAL uses the line impedances in the network to calculate the settings of protection
devices.

The following is true:

● PSS SINCAL observes all protection devices in the direction of the line.
● Parallel paths are observed separately.
● Ends of protection zones are observed separately.
● For the settings, PSS SINCAL uses the impedance sum that creates the smallest conductance
circle.

Types of Protection Zones

To determine the settings, PSS SINCAL simply adds up all the line impedances, similar to the way
many energy suppliers do in real networks.

The following illustration shows a protection zone as a spur.

Z4
Z1
Z2 Z3

𝑍𝑅 = 𝑍1 + 𝑍2 + 𝑍3 + 𝑍4

192 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

The following illustration shows a protection zone as a tree.

Z4

Z2 Z5
Z1

Z3
Z6

Z7

𝑍𝑅1 = 𝑍1 + 𝑍2 + 𝑍4

𝑍𝑅2 = 𝑍1 + 𝑍2 + 𝑍5

𝑍𝑅3 = 𝑍1 + 𝑍3 + 𝑍6

𝑍𝑅4 = 𝑍1 + 𝑍3 + 𝑍7

The following illustration shows a protection zone with a parallel path.

Z1 Z2

Z3

𝑍𝑅1 = 𝑍1 + 𝑍2

𝑍𝑅2 = 𝑍1 + 𝑍3

Determining the Conductance Circle

The conductance, or mho, circle is one whose diameter touches the r axis in the R/X level and the
x axis. To determine the conductance circle from impedance with R and X, a straight line that
normally goes to the impedance index through the point R/X in the R/X level has to intersect with
the r axis. The point of intersection is used for the diameter of the conductance circle.

ZRi

R
d

October 2019 193


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

4.2.6 Line Impedance Strategy Connected

PSS SINCAL uses the line impedances connected in the network to calculate the settings of
protection devices.

The following is true:

● PSS SINCAL closes all switches.


● PSS SINCAL observes all protection devices in the direction of the line.
● Parallel paths are observed separately.
● Ends of protection zones are observed separately.
● For the settings, PSS SINCAL uses the impedance sum that creates the smallest conductance
circle.

The only difference between this strategy and Line Impedance Strategy is that the switches are
closed.

4.2.7 Medium-Voltage Network Strategy

Medium-Voltage Network Strategy uses minimal loop impedance at the protection device to
determine protection device settings.

The following is true:

● PSS SINCAL observes all protection devices in the direction of the line.
● No modifications are made to the network.
● If there is a short circuit in the protection zone, there must be current and voltage at the
protection device.
● To determine minimum loop impedances for individual zones, PSS SINCAL calculates one
short circuit each directly behind every protection device limiting the protection zone.
● Entering a minimum value of R/X for impedance quadrilaterals assures ideal impedance areas
that are neither too narrow nor too high.

Types of Protection Zones

Distance protection devices investigate the fault impedance from line voltage and current found at
the location.

For protection devices to measure the impedance up to the fault location correctly, the current from
the protection device has to create the remaining voltage at the protection device. If this does not
happen (i.e., because there are parallel paths), the loop impedance will increase.

Protection Zone – Zone 1 (without Parallel Paths to Create the Remaining Voltage)

The example below illustrates that the network acts as a radial network for the protection device.
This is true for all faults in the protection zone during the first time period.

194 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

The following illustration shows a fault at a common node.

I1
Z1
IF
VF, IF
Z3

I2
Z2

𝑉𝐹 = 𝑍1 × 𝐼1 = 𝑍2 × 𝐼2

𝑉𝐹 𝑍1 × 𝐼1
𝑍𝑙𝑜𝑜𝑝 1 = = = 𝑍1
𝐼1 𝐼1

𝑉𝐹 𝑍2 × 𝐼2
𝑍𝑙𝑜𝑜𝑝 2 = = = 𝑍2
𝐼2 𝐼2

Since both of these supply the same voltage, the protection device registers the correct impedance
up to the fault location.

The following illustration shows a fault in the middle of a parallel line.

I1
Z1

VF, IF
Z3
IF
I2
Z21 Z22

𝑉𝐹 = 𝐼1 × (𝑍1 + 𝑍22 ) = 𝐼2 + 𝑍21

𝑉𝐹 𝐼1 × (𝑍1 + 𝑍22 )
𝑍𝑙𝑜𝑜𝑝 1 = = = 𝑍1 + 𝑍22
𝐼1 𝐼1

𝑉𝐹 𝐼2 × 𝑍21
𝑍𝑙𝑜𝑜𝑝 2 = = = 𝑍21
𝐼2 𝐼2

Protection Zone – Zone 2 (with Parallel Paths to Create the Remaining Voltage)

In the example below, note that there is no increase in loop impedance before the second time
period.

October 2019 195


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

The following illustration shows a fault at the end of the protection zone.

I1
Z1
IF
VF, IF
Z3

I2
Z2

𝑉𝐹 = 𝐼1 × 𝑍1 + 𝐼𝐹 × 𝑍3 = 𝐼2 × 𝑍2 + 𝐼𝐹 × 𝑍3

𝑉𝐹 𝐼1 × 𝑍1 + 𝐼𝐹 × 𝑍3 𝐼𝐹
𝑍𝑙𝑜𝑜𝑝 1 = = = 𝑍1 + × 𝑍3
𝐼1 𝐼1 𝐼1

𝑉𝐹 𝐼2 × 𝑍2 + 𝐼𝐹 × 𝑍3 𝐼𝐹
𝑍𝑙𝑜𝑜𝑝 2 = = = 𝑍2 + × 𝑍3
𝐼2 𝐼2 𝐼2

𝐼𝐹 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2

𝐼1 + 𝐼2 𝐼2
𝑍𝑙𝑜𝑜𝑝 1 = 𝑍1 + × 𝑍3 = 𝑍1 + (1 + ) × 𝑍3
𝐼1 𝐼1

𝐼1 + 𝐼2 𝐼1
𝑍𝑙𝑜𝑜𝑝 2 = 𝑍2 + × 𝑍3 = 𝑍2 + (1 + ) × 𝑍3
𝐼2 𝐼2

The loop impedance up to the fault location is no longer equal to the sum of the line impedances.
Since the fault current is divided between Lines 1 and 2, the registered loop impedance must be
greater than the sum of the line impedances.

4.3 Results of Settings Calculations


This simulation procedure generates results as settings calculated for distance protection devices
and diagrams (selective tripping schedules).

196 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Device Settings

Calculated Settings

PSS SINCAL lists the settings from the calculations in the data output form. If necessary, they can
also be used directly as input parameters in the settings. For a detailed description of how this is
done, see the example in Protection Device Settings.

Diagrams

For each protection device, PSS SINCAL generates two grading diagrams. These can be called up
with DI Device Settings – Grading Diagram (Z/t or X/t). The diagrams also have subordinate
protection devices in the protection zone. These diagrams show tripping behavior of the protection
devices over a period of time in dependence on the boundary impedance calculated.

The boundaries in the diagram are the intersecting points (Z or X) of the impedance area with lines
through the origin of the coordinate and the boundaries that has been calculated. If directional
current energizing has been entered, PSS SINCAL will show this after the last available level.

Since the boundary impedance does not have to agree with the registered loop impedance, this
tripping behavior purely prognostic. Protection route simulation is used to determine whether the
desired tripping behavior can actually be achieved. If the registered loop impedance of the
protection device is not the same as the calculated boundary impedance, this will produce different
tripping behavior in protection route simulation. In this case, protection device settings will need to
be calculated again using a different strategy, or modified by hand until the desired tripping
behavior is achieved.

October 2019 197


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Device Settings

Sometimes you also need to generate selective tripping diagrams for documentation without
determining the settings. Click Calculate – Protection Device Coordination – DI Device –
Charts in the menu to start this function.

The grading diagrams Z(t) and X(t) display the tripping characteristics for the first protection device
and the setting values for the time and impedance and reactance of the active zones.

Negative values are used for the reverse direction. If possible the setting value transformed to the
primary side is displayed (Zs and Xs). If the protection device does not have a setting value for the
impedance and reactance, the primary tipping point is displayed (Z k and Xk).

4.4 Hints and Cautions


Note the following:

● The procedure does NOT let you automatically switch measurement types. If the distance
protection device cannot be set with this type, PSS SINCAL aborts the calculations and
displays an error message. This also happens if a distance protection device supports different
types of measurement and the required setting could be done with another type of
measurement.
● If Zone 2 is less than Zone 1 PSS SINCAL gives Zone 2 the same setting as Zone 1.
● If Zone 3 is less than Zone 2 PSS SINCAL gives Zone 3 the same setting as Zone 2.

198 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Determining Fault Locations

5. Determining Fault Locations

This procedure localizes a fault at a protection device, determining the precise position of the fault
in the supply network.

Modern protection devices save the impedance that caused the tripping when there is a fault.
These values let you calculate the position of the fault in the network.

Determining fault locations can be calculated in 2 different ways.

● If there is a fault at a protection device (see the section on Protection Location in the chapter on
Data Description in the Input Data Manual), enter the impedances registered by the protection
device.
● Registered fault currents that were previously entered on measured values are used for
determining the fault locations.

5.1 Determining Fault Locations with Data of the Protection Devices


PSS SINCAL then goes through the network in the direction of the line, looking for every protection
device that has this data or with a terminal on which a measured value with fault currents is
present. This search stops at the next or second to the next protection device in the same direction.

ZR
L3

L1

L2

PSS SINCAL calculates short circuits along these lines, which have been divided up depending on
the accuracy for determining fault locations. If the impedance measured is between the registered
impedance of the following two short circuit calculations, PSS SINCAL records the impedance as a
hit. It also records the distance from the starting node.

In the above example, the fault is in Line L2. The impedance (Z R) for the fault was registered at the
protection device or the fault current is entered for the relevant measured value. The simulation
procedure indicates two possible locations of the fault – in Lines L2 and L3 – for the impedance
registered.

The accuracy for determining fault locations can be set in the Calculation Settings. Note that higher
accuracy increases calculation time.

5.2 Determining Fault Locations with Data of the Measured Values


This requires no other data to be entered with the protection devices. Measured values must be
taken at the same terminal instead. The measured values for current, current angle, voltage and
voltage angle are transferred to the protection device for determining fault locations.

October 2019 199


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Determining Fault Locations

In order to enter the currents of all conductors in different ways, up to 4 measured values (L1, L2,
L3 and N) are required on the same terminal.

The type of fault and the faulty phase(s) are determined on the basis of the values of the measured
currents. This information is required for the short circuit calculations.

The measured voltage is determined for checking the pickup in order to determine the direction.
The voltage is therefore unimportant for a non-directional trip. The current angle is also not
important for non-directional OC protection devices.

The pickup of the protection devices is then checked with these currents and voltages. A network
trace in the direction of the line is started for protection devices with a pickup. This search stops at
the next or second to the next protection device in the same direction.

As different locations are determined when measuring several protection devices, the individual
possible fault positions are evaluated. Besides the positions in the network, the deviation of the
measured currents from the calculated currents is also provided as the result.

IM1
Fko1

Fko2
L3
L1
L2 Fok IM2

In the example above, the actual fault is located on line L2. The percentage current deviation at this
fault position has a value of about zero. The percentage deviation at all other fault positions is
considerably higher.

As measured values are recalculated, the network is simulated as realistically as possible. A


calculation that strictly complies with the standard does not achieve this aim. The stated short
circuit calculation is not used here.

The current short-circuit capacity is used for infeeders. The current short-circuit capacity must also
reflect the current state.

The accuracy for determining fault locations can be set in the Calculation Settings. Note that higher
accuracy increases calculation time.

200 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Determining Fault Locations

5.3 Starting the Determining Fault Locations


The determining fault locations is started via Calculate – Protection Device Coordination –
Determining Fault Locations. This opens a special control dialog box in which the essential
parameters for the determination can be defined.

The Data from protection device and Data from measurement data selection fields are used to
specify whether the data for the calculation is taken from the protection device or whether the data
is transferred beforehand from the measured values to the protection devices.

5.4 Results of Determining Fault Locations


The determining fault location function provides all results in two ways:

● in the message window


● in the result view

The results in the Message Window are displayed in the form of information messages. So you
can identify the network elements that have faults (see the chapter on Messages in the System
Manual).

Message in the example:

● Determining fault locations by one protection device(s) between 350.0 and 400.0 meters from
the starting node (Line: L16, Protection Device: Dist in S9).

This message tells you how many protection devices registered the fault. It also lists the line where
the fault is presumably located, the distance from the fault to the starting node and the protection
devices that have registered the fault.

October 2019 201


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Determining Fault Locations

Additionally the results of determining fault locations are displayed in the Result View. Simply
select View – Result View in the menu.

The view used to display the results has a toolbar, control buttons and the view area.

With the control buttons the calculation procedure can be started and the documentation created.

The Determining Fault Locations button restarts the calculation procedure. This opens the wizard
in which the control parameters can be defined.

The Help button opens the Online Help.

Settings

In this section of the results view the most important parameters that were set in the control dialog
box at the start of the determining fault locations were displayed.

The entire network is the checked area.

The Calculation Type specifies whether the data of the protection device was used for the
calculation or whether the data of the measured values was transferred beforehand to the
protection devices.

202 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Determining Fault Locations

Results

This section shows the results of determining fault locations. This is displayed in tabular form. Each
line in the table visualizes a protection location of a device. Each protection device can have n fault
locations.

The first column in the table contains the name/short name of the protection device, the second
column the terminal (node/element) from which the distance on the element (see next two
columns) is measured.

The Range Min and Range Max columns specify the range in meters [m] within which the fault is
located.

If the Data from measurement data option is selected in the start dialog box, the Deviation
shown in the last column is from the measured values.

If the Data from measurement data option is selected in the start dialog box, the result table is
sorted firstly by deviation and then by protection device.

If the Data from protection device option was selected in the start dialog box, the sorting is only
carried out by protection device.

Control of the Display in the Results View

The display in the results view can be controlled via the option dialog box. This is opened by
clicking the Options button in the Results section.

The Display Topology section in the dialog box makes it possible to select whether the name or
the short name of the protection devices/nodes/elements is to be shown.

The Highlight in Graphic View section provides the following highlighting functions:

● Nothing:
No highlighting in the network graphic.
● Selected:
The protection device (yellow) and the fault location (red) of the data record currently selected
in the result view are highlighted in the graphic.
● Protection Device:
The protection device (yellow) of the data record currently selected in the result view and all
related fault locations (red) are highlighted in the graphic.

October 2019 203


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Determining Fault Locations

● All:
The protection devices (yellow) and fault locations (red) of all data records are highlighted in
the graphic.

Edit Functions in the Results View

The result view provides enhanced edit functions via the pop-up menu. This is opened by clicking
the right mouse button in the table. The functions provided in the pop-up menu are offered
according to the selected table field.

The Select in Graphics and Select in Tabular View functions enable the protection device to be
selected. If this function is activated in the area field, the protection device is selected.

204 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Determining Fault Locations

The Calculate function enables a protection coordination for a fault to be recalculated. A temporary
fault observation on the protection route is generated in the network graphic and the calculation of
the protection coordination is carried out. The pickup and tripping behavior of the protection
devices can thus be examined in detail.

The Create Fault Observation function generates a permanent fault observation for a selected
fault location on the protection route. This is useful if detailed analyses have to be carried out
frequently at a fault location.

It is possible to search for whole words by activating the Filter – Match whole word option in the
pop-up menu of the filter field. Otherwise detailed filtering requires the entry of wildcards.

The Options function opens the Options dialog box.

October 2019 205


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Dimensioning

6. Dimensioning

PSS SINCAL calculates the minimum 1-phase short circuit currents in low-voltage networks
according to the short circuit procedure specified in the calculation settings and determines the
maximum permissible amount of rated fuse current for fuses.

A differentiation must be made between a normal circuit-breaking examination and a circuit-


breaking examination that is made after the load flow has been calculated. In the latter case, load
currents from the load flow calculations produces the minimum rated fuse currents and examining
the cut-off conditions produces the maximum rated fuse current. If the load current from the load
flow calculations is greater than the permissible rated fuse current after the circuit-breaking
condition, PSS SINCAL records this in the output log.

Only fuses in network areas with a rated voltage less than 1 kV are accepted. PSS SINCAL does
not check branches with short circuit currents less than 6 A.

Dimensioning Calculation Procedures

Unload and check all network data

Create subnetwork using transformers

Determine fuse areas

Determine minimum short circuit power

Check tripping condition

Have all fuse areas been No


calculated?

Yes

Have all subnetworks been No


calculated?

Yes
Prepare results

206 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Dimensioning

6.1 Calculation Methods

Creating Subnetworks

Typically, networks are medium- and low-voltage networks. These low-voltage networks are
normally made up of several subnetworks.

Subnetwork1
Subnetwork2

Low-voltage network Subnetworkn

Medium-voltage network

Since medium-voltage networks are recreated by the ensuing short circuit power at the transformer
on the high-voltage side, they can be eliminated from the calculations. The pending short circuit
power is entered in the field Short Circuit Alternating Power of Calculation Settings.

Subnetworks can be found with the help of the network analysis in the low-voltage network. Since
the neutral-point coupling between the subnetworks is ignored, each subnetwork can be calculated
and observed separately.

The maximum permissible rated fuse current must be determined separately for each fuse in the
low-voltage network. The minimum 1-phase short circuit current for each fuse area must also be
determined. A fuse area is defined as the network up to the next fuse. A fuse area is also always
limited by a fuse or stub end.

PSS SINCAL searches for the location with the minimum total 1-phase short circuit current Ik"min in
each fuse area. The proportional fault currents that flow through the fuses and are the cause of the
tripping are also determined for this fault location.

October 2019 207


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Dimensioning

Radiating Networks

In a radiating network, the nearest fuse or the end of the line recreates the least favorable fault
location.

Trafo

Meshed Networks

Meshed networks are recreated here for several time periods called time steps. In the first time
step, all the fuses are still in the network and modifications to network topology have not yet been
calculated. PSS SINCAL takes fuse melting is taken into consideration in the subsequent time
steps.

The number of fuses bordering the fuse area is the same as the number of resulting time steps.

Time steps for a fuse area bordered by three fuses:

First Time Period

In3

Ik1

In1 In2

PSS SINCAL determines the location with the smallest 1-phase total short circuit current Ik1 and
calculates.

𝐼𝑘1 > 𝑘(𝐼𝑛1 + 𝐼𝑛2 + 𝐼𝑛3 )

208 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Dimensioning

Second Time Period

In3

In1 Ik21

Ik22

In1 In2

In3

Ik23

In2

In the second time step, PSS SINCAL recalculates the location with the smallest current Ik again
and recalculates Ik.

𝐼𝑘21 > 𝑘(𝐼𝑛1 + 𝐼𝑛3 )

𝐼𝑘22 > 𝑘(𝐼𝑛1 + 𝐼𝑛2 )

𝐼𝑘23 > 𝑘(𝐼𝑛2 + 𝐼𝑛3 )

October 2019 209


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Dimensioning

Third Time Period

Ik31

In1

Ik32

In2

In3

Ik33

In this third time step, only the stub ends and the installation locations of the fuses remain to be
checked.

𝐼𝑘31 > 𝑘 × 𝐼𝑛1

𝐼𝑘32 > 𝑘 × 𝐼𝑛2

𝐼𝑘33 > 𝑘 × 𝐼𝑛3

Location of Minimum Total Short Circuit Current

The location that produces the minimum total short circuit current is easily found for radiating
networks and for the last time step for meshed networks. It is at the end of the fuse area (the stub
end or the beginning of the new fuse area).

210 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Dimensioning

In meshed networks, short circuits are simulated at the nodes along the lines of the fuse area,
except for the last time step. The lines are divided into several imaginary sublines. Enter the
number of short circuit locations or lines in the field Subdivisions in the Calculation Settings.

Minimum Total Short Circuit Current

The minimum initial short circuit alternating current I k"1p can be determined in the following manner
according to VDE 0102 Part 2:

√3 × 𝑐 × 𝑉𝑛𝑁
𝐼𝑘"1𝑝 =
2𝑧1 + 𝑧0

I k"1p … Minimum 1-phase total short circuit current


VnN … Network rated voltage
z1 … Positive-phase-sequence impedance
z0 … Zero-phase-sequence impedance

0.95 * VNT is the driving voltage for calculating minimum 1-phase total short circuit current. Enter
this value in the Calculation Settings.

Determining Rated Fuse Current

PSS SINCAL determines the rated fuse current from the minimum 1-phase total short circuit
current and the number of picked-up protection devices using the following criteria:

● Safety factor (factor rated current)


● Conductor cross section
● Thermal damage – short circuit
● Thermal load time – current and large control current
● Maximum breaking time

If one of the above criteria are violated, PSS SINCAL uses the next smaller of the rated currents
possible for this type data.

Safety Factor (Factor Rated Current)

Each fuse’s safety factor (factor rated current) is found in the input data for this fuse. The following
condition has to be met:

𝐼𝑘"1𝑝
𝑘<
𝐼𝑓𝑐 × 𝑛𝑝𝑖𝑐𝑘𝑢𝑝

Ik"1p … Minimum 1-phase total short circuit current


k … Safety factor (rated current factor)
Ifc … Rated current fuse
npickup … Number of picked-up protection devices

October 2019 211


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Dimensioning

Conductor Cross Section

Depending on the conductor cross section, the rated fuse current strengths below cannot be
exceeded at copper cables according to VDE 0636.

Rated current Conductor cross


Inarea [A] section [mm2]
6 1
12 1,5
20 2,5
25 4
32 6
50 10
63 16
80 25
100 35
125 50
160 70
200 95
250 120
315 185
400 240
500 300
630 400
800 500
1000 600
1250 800

PSS SINCAL determines in each time step all lines of a protection zone for minimum short circuit
current and the smallest cross section for all the lines. The smallest cross section is then only
determined from the lines with minimum short circuit currents greater than the thermal limit current.
The following condition has to be met:

𝐼𝑓𝑐 < 𝐼𝑛𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎

Thermal Damage – Short Circuit

PSS SINCAL uses the characteristics curves of the type data and the minimum short circuit current
to interpolate the tripping time for each rated fuse current. Current and time are used to determine
the thermal energy I2t. If the maximum thermal energy is less than that of the network elements to
be protected, PSS SINCAL selects the next smaller rated fuse current.

The following condition has to be met:

𝐼 2 𝑡𝑠 < 𝐼 2 𝑡𝑒𝑙𝑚

212 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Dimensioning

Thermal Load Time – Current and Large Control Current

The tripping current of the protection device that is supposed to trip can, by international definition,
be only 1.45 times the current maximum load of the lines. The large control current of the
protection device has to be used as the tripping current. The current maximum load is the thermal
limit current Ith found in the line data. The table below shows the large control current from the rated
current according to VDE 0636:

Rated current Factor for large control


Ifc [A] current fI2 [pu]
Up to 4 2.1
5 to 10 1.9
11 to 25 1.75
Above 25 1.6

PSS SINCAL calculates all lines of a protection zone for minimum short circuit current and the
smallest thermal limit current of all the lines.

The following condition has to be met:

1.45 × 𝐼𝑡ℎ ≥ 𝐼𝑓𝑐 × 𝑓𝑙2

Maximum Breaking Time According to VDE 0100

Installation networks must have a maximum breaking time of five seconds according to VDE 0100.
PSS SINCAL uses type data characteristics and minimum short circuit current to interpolate the
tripping time for each rated fuse current. If the time is more than five seconds, PSS SINCAL selects
the next smaller rated fuse current.

The following condition has to be met:

𝑡𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑝𝑝 < 5

October 2019 213


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Analysis

7. Protection Analysis

The protection analysis checks the clearing of faults in the primary and backup protection area of
the protection devices. This breaks down the network into protection routes starting from the
selected protection devices. Each of these protection routes is divided with a definable step width
and a fault is simulated at every section. This checks whether the fault can be correctly cleared.

The results are shown in color and in tabular form. This documents whether a selective clearance
is possible, whether a protection overfunction or underfunction is present or whether a clearance is
not at all possible. The result table enables the setting of the protection devices to be assessed
very easily and clearly.

7.1 Process Description for Protection Analysis

Determining the Network Areas

The network areas for the protection analysis (primary protection) are restricted to the primary
protection area of the particular protection device. The network areas are determined by means of
a network trace. The network is run through starting from the protection device, in which the order
of the protection devices is defined by the node type (node of the terminal of the protection device).
The order is as follows: 1. primary substation, 2. network station, 3. busbar, 4. node and 5. joint.
The first subsequent protection device in the same direction is the end of the network area for the
protection analysis.

L1 L2

L3 L4

L5

The above network has the following network areas and protection routes:

● Network area 1 for protection device at Line L1:


Protection route Line L1
● Network area 2 for protection device at Line L2:
Protection route Line L2
● Network area 3 for protection device at Line L3:
Protection route Line L3 and Line L4
Protection route Line L3 and Line L5

The Treatment of Transformers attribute in Calculation Settings – Protection Settings enables the
protection zone of the individual protection devices to be defined. The protection zones can be
defined depending on the network modelling. Further information on this is provided in the section
Treatment of Transformers in chapter Defining with Calculation Settings.

214 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Analysis

If a transformer is located at the end of a route, this has a major effect on the route impedance. In
order to correctly include the impedance of the transformer, the calculation is therefore always
performed with 99 % of the route's length behind the transformer.

Determining the Tripping Behavior

The tripping behavior is examined for each protection route. For this a protection coordination is
carried out at the beginning and the end of each protection route. Further protection coordinations
are carried out along the protection route, depending on the distance set and its total length.

l = 3 km l = 7 km l = 2 km l = 6 km l = 2 km

The area shown above produces a total length of 20 km. With the distance of the individual fault
locations at 25 % of the total length, protection coordination is carried out every 5 km.

To determine the tripping behavior, 5 protection coordinations are therefore carried out in the
above network.

l ~ 0 km l = 5 km l = 10 km l = 15 km l ~ 20 km

Determining the Backup Protection

If a malfunction is activated (in the Control Data for Protection Analysis), several additional
protection routes are created for each protection route:

● With malfunction of the individual devices at the start terminal of the protection route
● With malfunction of the individual devices at the end terminal (if present) of the protection route

If the Device malfunction on all devices on a terminal option is activated, the following routes
are also created:

● With malfunction of all devices at the start terminal simultaneously


● With malfunction of all devices at the end terminal (if present) simultaneously
● With malfunction of the start and end device of the protection route, if the end device is present

The calculation and determination of the results is unchanged.

When the fault is recalculated via the Result View, the malfunctions are also considered.

The malfunction of the start device is shown in the following illustration.

Malfunction

October 2019 215


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Analysis

The malfunction of the end device is shown in the following illustration.

Malfunction

The malfunction of the start and end device is shown in the following illustration.

Malfunction Malfunction

There are 2 ways of determining the backup protection:

Default

To determine the backup protection, a network trace is carried out behind the failed protection
device in order to obtain all devices for the backup. Those devices that have not been activated are
not considered.

Each device of the backup protection must trip so that the protection can be considered to be
selective.

Extended

All devices at the same node and also those located opposite these devices, are considered as
backup protection. This does not take into account the chosen direction of the device.

With this mode, one of the protection devices of the backup protection must trip so that protection
is considered to be selective.

If the node of the protection device is assigned to a main busbar, all devices of the nodes also
assigned to this are considered as backup protection.

… Malfunction

… Backup device

If backup protection devices are defined manually, these are given preference for the particular
device and no determination is carried out.

216 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Analysis

If the Breaker malfunction option is selected, a breaker malfunction is simulated for all protection
devices located jointly on a feeder. It is assumed here that both devices act on the same circuit
breaker. Those devices that are connected via the teleprotection are also added to the determined
devices. A detailed description of the signal interlock is provided in the chapter Signal Interlock for
Zones.

7.2 Control Data for Protection Analysis


The protection analysis is started via Calculate – Protection Device Coordination – Protection
Analysis.

This opens an Assistant in which the essential parameters for protection analysis can be defined.

The Selection SC Method selection field is used to select whether the calculation is to be carried
out for one or several fault types.

The SC Method(s) selection field defines the types of fault. These can be as follows:

● With Single calculation, a dialog box is opened which is also displayed when the Short Circuit
Calculation is started. Only one short circuit method can be selected.
● With Multiple calculation, a dialog box is opened in which several short circuit methods can
be selected.

The Distance field defines the distances at which faults are calculated along the protection route.

The Fault Phase selection field defines the preferred type of fault. In other words, this fault is
simulated if all the required lines (in the protection route) are present.

October 2019 217


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Analysis

The Additional Fault Data selection field allows arc and ground impedances to be defined if
required, which are then considered in the protection analysis. It is also possible to set here a
factor for checking the pickup reliability (see chapter Additional Fault Data in the Input Data
Manual).

The Area to be checked section is used to define the extent of the protection analysis. The
following options can be selected here:

● All:
The protection routes are determined and checked for all protection devices present in the
network.
● Selection:
The protection routes are only determined and checked for those protection devices assigned
to the selected network elements. This option is only available if a selection is present in the
network graphic.
● Network Element Group:
The protection routes are only determined and checked for those network elements contained
in the selected network element group and their assigned protection devices. This option is
only available if a network element group is present.

Restricting the analysis area is particularly useful in large networks, because the protection
analysis requires a very large number of calculations due to the division of all protection routes.

The Stop at transformer option causes the route determination to stop at transformers. This
enables the protection analysis to be restricted to a voltage level.

The Limit routes by selected group option enables all routes to be calculated that are at least
partly located in the selected network element group. This option is only selectable if a network
element group is selected as a check area.

The Discard routes beyond selected group makes it possible to specify whether routes that are
not located completely within the network element group should be discarded. This option is only
selectable if a network element group is selected as a check area and the Limit routes by
selected group option is selected.

The extended settings for protection analysis are defined on the second page of the wizard.

218 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Analysis

The Extended Checks section enables selection from the following options in the Clearing time
selection list:

● None:
No additional check is carried out.
● Maximum fault clearing time:
A maximum fault clearing time can be entered here that is used for the check. If the clearing
time of the fault is greater than this specified time, the result is marked as an underfunction.
This makes it possible to identify fault locations with long clearing times.

The following malfunction types can be selected in the Malfunction selection list:

● None:
No malfunction is checked.
● Device:
Start and end devices of the route malfunction individually. These devices are therefore not
tripped and the tripping behavior of the backup protection can be examined. If the Device
malfunction on all devices on a terminal option is activated, additionally all devices
malfunction at the start terminal, at the end terminal or at the start and the end terminal.
● Breaker:
A circuit breaker malfunction is simulated for all devices that are located jointly on one terminal.
This applies both to the protection at the start and at the end of the protection zone. These
devices are therefore not tripped and the tripping behavior of the backup protection can be
examined. This communication connection is kept active if a signal comparison, e.g. a circuit
breaker malfunction protection, is present.

October 2019 219


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Analysis

The right selection list makes it possible to select between the following backup modes:

● Default:
To determine the backup protection, a network trace is performed behind the protection device
required to malfunction so that all the devices for the backup or which have a backup protection
function for the fault location are obtained. Those devices not carrying current are then
removed.
● Extended:
All devices at the same node and also those located opposite these devices, are considered as
backup protection.

The Destruction selection list makes it possible to select the type of destruction to be determined:

● None:
No destruction is determined.
● In route:
For this the admissible short circuit current on all lines of the route is used in order to determine
the shortest time until an element is destroyed. If the clearing time of the fault is greater than
this determined time, the result is marked as Destruction in route. This selection value is not
available if the Consider frequency protection option is active.
● In network:
For this the admissible short circuit current on all lines of the network is used in order to
determine the shortest time until an element is destroyed. If the clearing time of the fault is
greater than this determined time, the result is marked as Destruction in network. This
selection value is not available if the Consider frequency protection option is active.

The Options section enables the behavior of the protection analysis to be set.

The Enable backward routes option allows the reverse direction for protection devices to be
included in the route formation. This means that the protection areas and protection routes are
determined in the reverse direction for all non-directional or reverse-directional devices.

The Enable DIFF devices option enables the inclusion of differential protection devices in the
protection analysis.

The Enable busbar faults option enables additional faults on the start and end nodes of the
individual routes to be calculated. However, a fault is only calculated on the end node if an end
device is present on the route. The Result View displays these calculated faults on the 0 % and
100 % column. If no end device is present on the route, the fault is marked with an "x" for "not
calculable".

The Consider frequency protection option includes the frequency protection in the calculation.
This option requires the execution of protection coordination with stability (RNS) in order to check
the tripping of the frequency protection.

The Only consider machine protection within the protection area option only includes the
machine protection for the selectivity analysis if the machines/generating plant are located within
the protection area to be considered. Machine protection involves protection devices that provide
frequency protection and/or voltage protection.

220 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Analysis

The Device malfunction on all devices on a terminal option (protection device malfunction)
makes it possible to specify if additional routes are to be formed, at which all devices malfunction
on a terminal. Up to 3 routes would be added here:

● All devices at the start terminal malfunction.


● All devices at the end terminal malfunction.
● All devices at the start and end terminal malfunction.

7.3 Results of the Protection Analysis


The results of the protection analysis are displayed in the results view. Simply select View – Result
View in the menu.

The view used to display the results has a toolbar, control buttons and the view area.

2 different types of results can be displayed:

● Results for selectivity and functionality


● Results for thermal destruction

October 2019 221


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Analysis

With the control buttons the calculation procedure can be started and the documentation created.

The Protection Analysis button restarts the calculation procedure. This opens the wizard in which
the control parameters can be defined.

PSS SINCAL enables the result of the contingency analysis to be exported as a report so that it
can be used later in other Windows applications. For this the memory location of the exported
report can be selected and the file name entered. The scope of the output is controlled using the
Options dialog box.

The Export button enables the entire table to be exported to a CSV file. A detailed description of
this function is provided in the chapter Editing Functions in the Results View.

The Help button opens the Online Help.

Settings

In this section of the results view the most important parameters that were set in the control dialog
box at the start of the protection analysis were displayed.

The Short Circuit Method is assigned a hyperlink after calculating multiple fault types, which
enables the required short circuit method to be selected in the following dialog box for display in the
result view.

The Select Result area makes it possible to select the currently displayed short circuit method.

222 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Analysis

The Compare with area shows all the calculated short circuit methods for selection in the
comparison. If a method is selected here, the routes are checked for parity. If they are identical,
each fault can be compared with another one from the different methods. The "worst case" is
always displayed. The "worst case" is determined with the following priority:

● Results for Selectivity and Functionality:


1. Not cleared, 2. Underfunction, 3. Overfunction, 4. Selective, 5. Not calculable.
● Results for Thermal Destruction:
1. Destruction in route, 2. Destruction in network, 3. Without destructions, 4. Not calculable.

The SC Methods column of the table of the result view then shows the short circuit methods that
were contained in the route after the comparison – starting with the main short circuit type.

A hyperlink is assigned to the Check Area. By clicking it, all those network elements in the
graphics editor are selected that were considered in the protection analysis.

Results

This section shows the results of the protection analysis. This is displayed in tabular form with a
simple color coding. Each line in the table visualizes a protection route that was checked. A
protection area consists of one or several protection routes. A three-end protection route with for
example two protection devices is made up of three protection routes. However, all the protection
routes belong to the primary protection area of the individual devices.

The first column of the table contains information on the protection area. In the two other columns,
the protection device at the start of the route and the one at the end of the route is shown.

The calculated fault locations are visualized along the protection route. The color indicates the
result of the protection analysis.

Tripping:

Selective:
All protection devices selective, fault was cleared.

Not cleared

Underfunction:
Not all devices that are expected to trip actually do trip, but the fault is nevertheless
cleared.

Overfunction:
The fault is cleared by the primary protection but at least another protection device trips
although it should not.

Not calculable:
This indicates that the selected fault type could not be calculated at the fault location
shown (e.g. a three-phase short circuit on a network element with only one conductor).

Display in table:
The value displayed in the table and selected in the options is specified here with the
short name.

October 2019 223


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Analysis

Destruction:

Without destruction:
There is no destruction in the route.

Destruction(s) in route:
An element was destroyed in the route by the calculated fault.

Destruction(s) in network:
An element was destroyed in the network (outside of the route) by the calculated fault.

Not calculable:
This indicates that the selected fault type could not be calculated at the fault location
shown (e.g. a three-phase short circuit on a network element with only one conductor).

Display in table:
The value displayed in the table and selected in the options is specified here with the
short name.

The very simple display form, which only shows the essential information, allows the correct
operation of the protection in large networks to be clearly assessed.

Extended marking in the table:

● The left pointing arrow behind the zone ID indicates a reverse route.
● A cross behind the ID of a protection device (start, end) indicates a malfunction of the particular
device.

If a malfunction is switched on in the Control Data for Protection Analysis, the first three backup
devices are listed in an additional column (to save space) as a link for marking in the graphic. All
backup devices can be displayed via the pop-up menu.

If a comparison of the short circuit methods is activated, an additional SC Methods column is


displayed with the short circuit methods present in the route.

224 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Analysis

Control of the Display in the Results View

The display in the results view can be controlled via the option dialog box. This is opened by
clicking the Options button in the Results section.

View Options

The Number of records field makes it possible to specify the number of routes that are displayed
on a page.

The Display Topology selection field makes it possible to select whether the name of the
protection device is to be shown in the start and end column or the terminal of the protection
device.

The Display in Table selection field makes it possible to select whether to display only the clearing
time for the fault, the clearing time and the maximum time until a line on the route is destroyed, the
picked up and tripped devices with the number of loops or the maximum fault current Ik"max over
all loops. If the maximum time, until a line of the route is destroyed, is greater than the clearing time
of the fault, this field is marked as an underfunction.

The Destruction selection field can also be used to switch to the view of the destroyed elements.
This displays the clearing time and the maximum time until a line of the route or a network is
destroyed.

Scope of Representation

This area is used to select whether only the primary protection, only the backup protection or both
are to be displayed. If neither one is selected, only the primary protection is displayed. It is also
possible to select whether the busbar faults are to be displayed. However, this option is only
available if busbar faults are also calculated. The last option button makes it possible to select
whether to only display protection routes with problems.

October 2019 225


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Analysis

Hightlight in Graphic View

The results shown in the results table can also be visualized in the graphics editor. This is done by
selecting a route in the result table and the following settings:

● Nothing:
No highlighting in the network graphic.
● Selected protection zone:
All elements of the protection zone marked in the table are highlighted in blue in the network
graphic.
● Selected protection route:
The elements of the protection route marked in the table are highlighted as in the table in the
graphic. The highlighting colors correspond to the display in the table. This is shown in the
following illustration.
● Backup protection:
The route is highlighted in blue, the primary protection in yellow and the backup protection
devices are shown in purple. If the Extended backup protection mode is active, the following
protection devices topologically nearest nodes are highlighted in different shades of purple.
● Destruction in route:
The destroyed elements in the route are highlighted in red.
● Destruction in network:
The destroyed elements in the network are highlighted in orange. If a destroyed element is
present in the route, this is highlighted in red.

226 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Protection Analysis

Editing Highlighting Settings

The highlighting settings can be defined in the Options dialog box. This is opened by clicking the
Edit button in the Highlight in Graphic View section.

Pen Width and Min. Pen Width can be entered in the Highlight Options section for highlighting
elements.

The Alpha option enables the opacity of the highlighting to be defined. Values between 0
(transparent) and 255 (fully opaque) can be set.

Edit Functions in the Results View

The result view provides enhanced edit functions via the pop-up menu. This is opened by clicking
the right mouse button in the table. The functions provided in the pop-up menu are offered
according to the selected table field.

The Details function enables the results for a calculated fault location to be clearly displayed in the
screen form.

The Select in Graphics and Select in Tabular View functions enable the network elements of a
protection route to be selected. If this function is activated in the Zones field, the network elements
of the entire area are selected.

October 2019 227


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Protection Analysis

Clicking Primary Protection Devices opens the protection device screen form and the primary
protection devices are displayed. Backup Protection Devices enables these to be listed in this
screen form. The Tripped Protection Devices menu opens the protection device screen form. The
state of the protection devices is shown in the screen form.

Can trip, has tripped

Can trip, has not tripped

Must not trip, has tripped

Unlike the normal screen form, no results are displayed in these screen forms.

The Calculate function enables a protection coordination for a fault on the protection route to be
recalculated. A temporary fault observation on the protection route is generated in the network
graphic and the calculation of the protection coordination is carried out. The pickup and tripping
behavior of the protection devices can thus be examined in detail.

The Create Fault Observation function generates a permanent fault observation for a selected
fault location on the protection route. This is useful if detailed analyses have to be carried out
frequently at a fault location.

The Export function enables the entire table to be written to a CSV file. The result of the protection
analysis is shown here as follows:

● SE … Selective
● OF … Overfunction
● UF … Underfunction
● NC … Non selective

If the backup calculation is active and backup protection devices are present, the devices are listed
in the last column of the CSV file – comma separated.

The New Result File menu enables the result file to be saved under a different name in order to
then switch between several calculations. Switching is carried out in the toolbar via the Select
result file selection field. Default denotes here the currently calculated result file.

It is possible to search for whole words by activating the Filter – Match whole word option in the
pop-up menu of the filter field. Otherwise detailed filtering requires the entry of wildcards.

The Options function opens the Options dialog box.

228 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Check OC Settings

8. Check OC Settings

This calculation makes it possible to carry out a simplified check of the setting values of OC
protection devices. The essential idea here is to use the feeder-based display of the protection
area to identify and visualize incorrect setting values.

The calculation procedure features two different check modes which can be selected.

● Settings Verification
● k Factor Verification

8.1 Settings Verification


This check mode enables the setting values I>, I>> and I>>> of OC protection devices to be
checked with regard to current selectivity and time selectivity.

The calculation procedure is started via Calculate – Protection Device Coordination – Check
OC Settings. This starts a Wizard in which the checking parameters can be defined.

The Mode section enables the Settings Verification to be activated.

Check Area

This section defines the check area. It is possible to choose here between the options Selection,
Network element group and Feeder.

October 2019 229


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Check OC Settings

The check is always started at the terminal of a network element (node and branch element). A
network trace is carried out in the direction of load flow starting at this point in order to determine
the check area. The check area ends at transformers and variable serial elements which are
connected with another network level. However, it is also possible to select at the same time
several nodes and network elements connected to them. Each of these outgoers is then checked.

The selected nodes and branch elements can be stored in a Network element group for more
convenient operation. These can then also be selected for the check. For example, this enables
checks to be predefined for specific network areas and configurations.

The check area defined by Feeder is a special form of area. The feeders determined in the user
interface are used here to define the check area.

Options

This section is used to define the scope of the check. The Time selectivity option checks the time
selectivity, and the Current selectivity option the selectivity of the current.

The Minimum time difference defines the minimum permissible difference between the setting
values to be checked. If the value is below this limit, the selectivity criterion is not fulfilled and is
indicated as an error.

Configure List of Excluded Devices

This dialog page enables the protection devices to be defined which are not to be included in the
check. This is useful if settings were intentionally made on the device, which violate the selectivity
settings to be checked. To document this, it is also possible to enter a suitable comment for the
device.

Click Add to open a dialog box where you can select the OC device. Clicking the Edit button
enables the excluded protection device to be provided with a suitable comment which is output in
the log. Click Add to open a dialog box where you can select the OC device. Delete removes the
OC device currently selected from the list.

230 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Check OC Settings

8.1.1 Implementation of the Check Functions

Checking Time Selectivity

A network trace is carried out in the supply direction (based on the load flow results), starting from
the selected terminal of a branch element. This determines the subnetwork to be checked. The
subnetwork is analyzed from beginning to end, and protection devices that are further away from
the beginning must have a shorter tripping time than those in front. The minimum permissible
difference to the tripping time is set in the Wizard.

In order to include the protection areas of line sections correctly, another network trace is carried
out, which determines the right protection device combination at the start and the end of the
protection area (i.e. one device in the forward direction and one in the reverse direction). The
tripping time for this protection device combination can be the same.

If the analysis finds incorrectly set protection devices, a warning is displayed and detailed
information on the problem setting values is shown.

Checking of Current Selectivity

This check is essentially the same as the time selectivity check, although the current values of the
protection devices are used for the check. Protection devices that are further away from the
beginning must have lower current values for tripping. If not, a warning is displayed and information
is output in the message window.

General Settings for the Check

Only OC protection devices are included in the check, all others protection device types are
ignored.

The check of current selectivity is restricted to radial networks. If the check area is not radial, an
error message is displayed and a corresponding message is shown in the log.

The determination of the check area is based on the load flow results. In other words, load flow
results must be present and also shown on screen in order to carry out a check.

October 2019 231


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Check OC Settings

8.1.2 Results of the Check Function

The results of the check are displayed in the result view. Simply select View – Result View in the
menu. This shows the topological data of the checked area and the associated results. The check
status is shown for each protection device.

The view used to display the results has a toolbar, control buttons and the view area.

With the control buttons the calculation procedure can be started and the results exported.

Clicking this button opens the Wizard and a new check can be carried out.

This function makes it possible to export the check results to a simple CSV file. This contains
protection device names, installation locations and check status, and can also be used for
reprocessing and analyzing other programs.

The Help button opens the Online Help.

232 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Check OC Settings

Settings

In this section of the results view the most important parameters that were set in the control dialog
box at the start of the check OC settings procedure were displayed.

Results

This section visualizes the results of the calculation procedure. The results are displayed in tabular
form, in which the protection devices are shown in topological order in the checked feeders.

The table can visualize the phase and ground settings of the OC protection devices for the selected
check area. Click the title bar to move between phase and ground settings. The table shows the
complete protection area in the topologically correct order and thus enables straightforward
evaluation of upstream and downstream protection devices.

The setting values of the tripping zones I>, I>> and I>>> are displayed for each protection device.
The color coding here visualizes whether the setting values meet the check criteria:

● Green:
Selectivity check was successful. No problem was found.
● Red:
The selectivity check has failed. At least one check criterion was not observed. All violations of
check criteria are shown.
● Purple:
The protection device was excluded from the check.

The relevant devices are indicated by arrows in the table so that the setting values of a selected
protection device can be checked in context with the upstream and downstream protection devices.

The illustration shown visualizes the details for the incorrectly set OC4 protection device. This
shows clearly a violation of the time selectivity because the same tripping time was set as in the
OC3 protection device in front of it.

October 2019 233


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Check OC Settings

Control of the Display in the Results View

The display in the results view can be controlled via the option dialog box. This is opened by
clicking the Options button in the Results section.

The Display Topology section in the dialog box makes it possible to select whether the name of
the protection device is to be shown in the start and end column or the terminal of the protection
device.

The Scope of Representation section, enables you to select whether to display only feeders with
faults.

The Highlight in Graphic View section provides the following highlighting functions:

● Nothing:
No highlighting in the network graphic.
● Feeder:
The checked feeder is highlighted in the network graphic, and the protection device selected in
the table as well as the upstream and downstream protection devices are highlighted.

234 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Check OC Settings

Edit Functions in the Results View

The result view provides enhanced edit functions via the pop-up menu. This is opened by clicking
the right mouse button in the table. The functions provided in the pop-up menu are offered
according to the selected table field.

The Select in Graphics and Select in Tabular View functions enable the network elements of a
protection route to be selected. If this function is activated in the area field, the network elements of
the entire area are selected.

Clicking Protection Devices opens the screen form of the protection device.

October 2019 235


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Check OC Settings

The Export function enables the entire table to be written to a CSV file. This contains protection
device names, installation locations and check status, and can also be used for reprocessing and
analyzing other programs.

It is possible to search for whole words by activating the Filter – Match whole word option in the
pop-up menu of the filter field. Otherwise detailed filtering requires the entry of wildcards.

The Options function opens the Options dialog box.

8.2 k Factor Verification


With this check mode it is possible to analyze whether the current set for the protection devices will
cause tripping in the event of a fault with sufficient safety (k Factor).

The calculation procedure is started via Calculate – Protection Device Coordination – Check
OC Settings. This starts a Wizard in which the checking parameters can be defined.

The Mode section enables the k Factor Verification to be activated.

Check Area

This section defines the check area. It is possible to choose here between the options Selection,
Network element group and Feeder.

The check is always started at the terminal of a network element (node and branch element). A
network trace is carried out in order to determine the check area. The check area ends at
transformers and variable serial elements which are connected with another network level.
However, it is also possible to select at the same time several nodes and network elements
connected to them. Each of these outgoers is then checked.

236 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Check OC Settings

The selected nodes and branch elements can be stored in a Network element group for more
convenient operation. These can then also be selected for the check. For example, this enables
checks to be predefined for specific network areas and configurations.

The check area defined by Feeder is a special form of area. The feeders determined in the user
interface are used here to define the check area.

Options

The SC Method selection field makes it possible to define which type of short circuit is used for the
check.

The Minimal k-Factor field defines which safety factor for tripping must be achieved using the
minimum short circuit current in the protection area. If the value is below this setting, it is evaluated
as a faulty parameter setting. This value is saved for each short circuit method separately in the
database.

The Minimal backup k Factor field defines which safety factor for tripping must be achieved using
the minimum short circuit current occurring in the protection area. If the value is below this setting,
it is evaluated as a faulty parameter setting in the backup protection. This value is saved for each
short circuit method separately in the database.

The Check overload tripping option enables a further check to be carried out for the load flow.
This checks whether protection devices are already tripping by means of the load flow currents
present.

The Detection of rated protection device current option defines that the minimum tripping
current set at the device is used for the check. If this option is deactivated, the rated current of the
current transformer or fuse rated current is used.

The Check low voltage network according to VDE 0102 option is an advanced check function,
making it possible to analyze whether the VDE 0102 requirements for OC protection devices are
met. If activated, the following additional checks are carried out:

● Min. Cross Section:


Feeders with a rated voltage <= 1 kV are checked for whether the cross sections of conductors
meet VDE 0636 requirements. This stipulates the use of specific conductor cross sections
depending on the rated voltage of the protection device.
● Min. Thermal Limit Current:
International specifications stipulate that the tripping current of the protection device that
definitely causes a trip must not exceed 1.45 times the current carrying capacity of the
conductors. This checks whether the conductors meet this criterion in the feeder section:
1.45 × 𝐼𝑡ℎ ≥ 𝐼𝑠𝑛 × 𝑓𝑙2
● Min. Admissible SC Current:
The thermal energy I2t in the event of a fault can be determined from the short circuit current
and the tripping time. It must be ensured here that the permissible energy of the conductors is
not exceeded:
𝐼 2 𝑡𝑠 < 𝐼 2 𝑡𝑒𝑙𝑚
● Max. Tripping Time:
According to VDE 0102, the tripping time of the protection devices in the event of a fault must
be less than 5 seconds:
𝑡𝑎𝑢𝑠𝑙 < 5

October 2019 237


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Check OC Settings

Configure List of Excluded Devices

This dialog page enables the protection devices to be defined which are not to be included in the
check. This is useful if settings were intentionally made on the device, which violate the selectivity
settings to be checked. To document this, it is also possible to enter a suitable comment for the
device.

Click Add to open a dialog box where you can select the OC device. Clicking the Edit button
enables the excluded protection device to be provided with a suitable comment which is output in
the log. Click Add to open a dialog box where you can select the OC device. Delete removes the
OC device currently selected from the list.

8.2.1 Implementation of the Check Functions

Determining the Check Area

The check area varies according to the control option selected in the wizard:

● Marking or Network Element Group:


A network trace is carried out starting from the selected terminal of a branch element. The
check area ends at transformers and variable serial elements which are connected with
another network level.
● Feeder:
This uses a determined feeder as a check area. The check area always starts at the terminal at
the transformer substation of the feeder. The elements of the feeder are processed in
topological order, which is determined by a network trace.

The check area ends at transformers and variable serial elements which are connected with
another network level.

238 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Check OC Settings

Determining the Protection Device Rated Current

The determination of the protection device rated current I Dev can be simplified or extended as
required. With simplified determination the fuse rated current is used for fuses and the rated
current of the assigned current transformer for all other protection device types.

With extended determination the smallest current of the OC tripping zones Ip, I<, I<< and I<<< is
used as protection device rated current.

Checking the Load Tripping

This checks whether the current present in the load flow is smaller than the protection device
current.

𝐿𝐿𝑓 < 𝐼𝐷𝑒𝑣

If this criterion is not fulfilled, a faulty protection device setting is shown.

Checking the k Factor

The k Factor is determined individually for each protection device using the smallest fault current.
For this the protection area of the protection device is determined and a short circuit calculation
carried out at different points in order to determine the smallest fault current present. The following
illustration shows the determination of the smallest fault current for the protection area of the device
on line L3.

L1 L2

L3 L4

L5

The k Factor is then determined simply from the protection device rated current and the minimum
fault current.

"
𝑖𝑘𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑘 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 =
𝐼𝐷𝑒𝑣

This k Factor must be greater than the set min. k Factor.

𝑚𝑖𝑛. 𝑘 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 < 𝑘 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟

If this requirement is not fulfilled, a faulty protection device setting is shown.

October 2019 239


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Check OC Settings

8.2.2 Results of the Check Function

The results of the check are displayed in the result view. Simply select View – Result View in the
menu. This shows the topological data of the checked area and the associated results. The check
status is shown for each protection device.

The view used to display the results has a toolbar, control buttons and the view area.

With the control buttons the calculation procedure can be started and the results exported.

Clicking this button opens the Wizard and a new check can be carried out.

This function makes it possible to export the check results to a simple CSV file. This contains
protection device names, installation locations and check status, and can also be used for
reprocessing and analyzing other programs.

The Help button opens the Online Help.

240 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Check OC Settings

Settings

In this section of the results view the most important parameters that were set in the control dialog
box at the start of the check OC settings procedure were displayed.

Results

This section visualizes the results of the calculation procedure. The results are shown in a table,
with the protection devices shown in topological order in the checked feeders.

The Feeder column contains the start node and the first network element of the feeder that was
checked.

The Location column contains the installation location of the protection device.

The LF Current column shows the registered load flow current.

The SC Current column contains the minimum fault current in the protection area registered by the
protection device and its position is shown in the SC Position column.

The Tripping Current column shows the minimum current set at the protection device and the
Adm. Tripping Current column the current that should be set on the basis of the set k Factor.

The k Factor column contains the value determined by the division of the fault current by the
tripping current. If this value is below the set minimum k Factor, it is shown in red and a fault status
is indicated.

When the Check low voltage network according to VDE 0102 option is activated, the following
additional columns are displayed:

● Min. cross section of the protection area


● Min. thermal limit current of the protection area
● Min. admissible SC current of the protection area
● Max. tripping time of the protection area

If the check is possible, the particular value is also highlighted in color.

October 2019 241


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Check OC Settings

The State column shows the result of the check:

● OK (green):
k-Factor check was successful. No problem was found.
● KO (red):
A check criterion was violated. This can be the k Factor, a load trip, a fault in the backup
protection or one of the four criteria from the low voltage network check in accordance with
VDE 0102. The violated criterion is shown.

The Comment column contains the text that was stored at the protection devices excluded for the
check.

A detailed display can be opened out for each protection device for checking the settings for
backup protection. The detailed display can be opened and closed via the button in the 2nd
column. The above illustration shows an example of backup protection for the OC3 protection
device. The backup devices are those protection devices that are required to ensure disconnection
if the primary protection device fails.

Note the following: All currents are shown with primary (from the power supply) values.

Control of the Display in the Results View

The display in the results view can be controlled via the option dialog box. This is opened by
clicking the Options button in the Results section.

The View Options section in the dialog box makes it possible to select whether the name of the
protection device is to be shown in the start and end column or the terminal of the protection
device.

The Show secondary values option makes it possible to control whether the primary or secondary
current values are to be displayed in the result table.

The Scope of Representation section enables you to select whether to display only feeders with
faults.

The Highlight in Graphic View section provides the following highlighting functions:

● Nothing:
No highlighting in the network graphic.

242 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Check OC Settings

● Feeder:
The checked feeder is highlighted in the network graphic. The protection device selected in the
table as well as the backup devices are also highlighted.
● Protection area:
This option only highlights the protection area of the selected protection device. The protection
device selected in the table as well as the backup devices are likewise highlighted.
● Violations of feeder:
The protection devices of the feeder are highlighted in green if there is no limit value violation.
The relevant device is highlighted in red if a limit value violation occurs.
● All violations:
The protection devices of all feeders are highlighted in green if there is no limit value violation.
The relevant device is highlighted in red if a limit value violation occurs.

Edit Functions in the Results View

The result view provides enhanced edit functions via the pop-up menu. This is opened by clicking
the right mouse button in the table. The functions provided in the pop-up menu are offered
according to the selected table field.

October 2019 243


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Check OC Settings

The Select in Graphics and Select in Tabular View functions enable the network elements of a
protection route to be selected. If this function is activated in the area field, the network elements of
the entire area are selected.

Clicking Protection Devices opens the protection device screen form.

The Export function enables the entire table to be written to a CSV file. This contains protection
device names, installation locations and check status, and can also be used for reprocessing and
analyzing other programs.

It is possible to search for whole words by activating the Filter – Match whole word option in the
pop-up menu of the filter field. Otherwise detailed filtering requires the entry of wildcards.

The Options function opens the Options dialog box.

244 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Results of the Determining Fault Locations

9. Results of the Determining Fault Locations

The Determining Fault Location calculation procedure presents the results in the form of an
SQLite database. The Location table shows the required data records for further processing.

Attribute name Data type Description


Location_ID Integer Primary Key – fault position for a protection device
Device_ID Integer Protection device ID
Device_RowType Integer Protection device type
Device_DBNr Integer Protection device database number
Device_Name Text Protection device name
Device_ShortName Text Protection device short name
Terminal_ID Integer Terminal ID
(the terminal, from which the distances LMin and LMax go out)
Node_ID Integer Node ID
(the node, from which the distances LMin and LMax go out)
Node_DBNr Integer Node database number
Node_Name Text Node name
Node_ShortName Text Node short name
Element_ID Integer Element ID
(the Element, on which the fault position is located)
Element_RowType Integer Element type
Element_DBNr Integer Element database number
Element_Name Text Element name
Element_ShortName Text Element short name
LMin Real Fault position minimum
LMax Real Fault position maximum
SC_Module Text Short circuit method of the fault
Flag_FaultPhase Integer Internal faulty phase type
Flag_FaultPhaseGUI Integer Faulty Phase
1: L1
2: L2
3: L3
4: L12
5: L23
6: L31
7: L123

October 2019 245


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Examples

10. Examples

This chapter contains examples for Protection Coordination and Creating Protection
Documentation.

10.1 Example for Protection Coordination


Below is a simple example of how Protection Coordination works. The following descriptions
show:

● Presetting Calculation Settings


● Creating Protection Devices
● Making Fault Observations
● Making Fault Events
● Determining Settings for DI Protection Devices
● Checking Tripping Behavior for Protection Devices
● Starting the Protection Calculations
● Displaying and Evaluating the Results
● Generating Protection Routes

Basic Data

All descriptions are based on the following example network.

When you install PSS SINCAL, the program automatically provides a network ("Example Prot"),
which can be used to check the simulation procedure.

The names of protection devices in the network are chosen so that devices at the beginning and
end of a protection route all have the same name and the device at the end has a "G". In the above
example, devices "D1" and "D1G" are in the protection route between "K1" and "K3".

246 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Examples

To calculate protection coordination, Protection Device Coordination in the Calculate –


Methods menu has to be activated (see Presetting Calculation Methods in the chapter on User
Interface in the User Manual).

10.1.1 Presetting Calculation Settings

In the Calculation Settings screen form, click the Protection Settings tab to set parameters for
the calculations. To open the screen form, click the menu item Calculate – Settings.

Important are the settings in the first part of this tab. The Strategy field sets which procedure
PSS SINCAL uses. Enter the selective grading factor you want in Sel. Grading Factor – 2nd
Zone. If the distance is less than this value, PSS SINCAL will send a warning message.

For a detailed description of all available calculation settings, see the section on Protection Settings
– Calculation Settings in the chapter on Calculation Settings in the Input Data Manual.

10.1.2 Creating Protection Devices

The following examples show only how to create and edit protection devices. The instructions
describe how real networks are created (see the chapter on Using an Example to Work on a
Network in the System Manual).

October 2019 247


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Examples

The simplest way to create protection devices is to use the pop-up menu. To open it, right-click the
terminal of that network element where you want to add the protection device.

Selecting Protection Device opens an input data screen form for entering the name and the alias
type name of the new protection device and the protection device types on the installation location.

In the list of types, select the protection device you want to create. You can even create multiple
protection device types at one location.

248 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Examples

In our example, a distance protection device has been created with the name D5. Click OK, and
PSS SINCAL opens the screen form for protection devices.

The left side of the dialog box has a browser with the new distance protection device. When the
new device is selected, PSS SINCAL displays the general data at the right side of the dialog box.

General data show, among other things, where the protection device, its pre-switched current and
voltage transformer and the directional element are located. See Protection Location for a detailed
description of all the fields.

General data can also be used to turn protection devices OFF (without deleting them). This
switches Out of service ON. PSS SINCAL disregards this protection device in the calculations. A
special protection device symbol shows that this has been switched OFF.

October 2019 249


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Examples

The settings of the protection devices are both device- and type-specific. Click Settings in the
browser to display and edit them.

This screen form is used to define individual settings for the new impedance-protection device.

With distance protection devices, select the type of protection device and the type of measurement.
Also enter the selective distance factors and the tripping times.

With OC protection devices, select the protection device type from the protection device database
and enter the settings in the dialog box.

10.1.3 Making Fault Observations

Fault Observation place "faults" at nodes and terminals of network elements in the network.

The following simulation procedures involve fault observations:

● Protection simulation
● Multiple faults
● Dynamics

250 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Examples

The simplest way to create fault observations is to use the pop-up menu. To open it, right-click the
terminal of that network element where you want to add the fault observation.

PSS SINCAL displays a screen form for the fault observation.

For a detailed description of how to enter data for fault observations, see the section on the Fault
Observation in the chapter on General Control and Input Data in the Input Data Manual.

10.1.4 Making Fault Events

Fault events let you group different fault observations. The protection coordination treat fault
observations grouped in this way as simultaneous faults.

October 2019 251


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Examples

Select Data – Fault Definition – Fault Event in the menu to define fault events.

Fault events only have a Fault Event Name and an Operating State. The state specifies whether
or not PSS SINCAL considers the package in the calculations.

You can assign individual fault observations to the fault events directly in the basic data of the fault
observation. Simply select the package you want in the Fault Event field.

10.1.5 Determining Settings for DI Protection Devices

In the procedure to determine protection device settings, PSS SINCAL uses set grading factors
and delay times to calculate settings for distance protection devices in individual protection areas.
Note that PSS SINCAL only calculates time settings for distance levels when 0.0 seconds has
been entered as the tripping time for the level.

Start to Determine Settings

To start DI device settings determination, click Calculate – Protection Device Coordination – DI


Device – Settings.

If there are no errors in the determination, PSS SINCAL automatically opens the DI Device –
Settings results browser.

The Results browser can even be opened later by clicking View – Other Windows – Result
Browser or Calculate – Results – DI-Protection Device – Settings in the menu. In the selection
field, you can switch ON the output display for DI Device – Settings.

252 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Examples

This loads the final results for contingency analysis and displays them in the results browser.

The Results browser has a filter field at the top to reduce the amount to be displayed in the list.
The filter field even has a control button that you can click to display a menu.

The menu has the following functions to customize how PSS SINCAL displays the list of options.

● Filter:
Opens a dialog box to filter and sort the data by various criteria. For a precise description of
how this works, see the section on Filter Functions in Tabular View in the chapter on Tabular
View in the System Manual.
● Disable Filter:
Temporarily deletes a defined filter. All the data are displayed again.

This Results browser lists all the distance protection devices and its state in the network.
PSS SINCAL automatically selects all devices that have no settings. You can also select additional
devices from the list.

The pop-up menu provides enhanced editing functions.

October 2019 253


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Examples

The following functions are available.

● Edit:
Opens the screen form of the attributes for the selected distance protection device.
● Select All:
Selects all distance protection devices in the list.
● Select Calculated:
Selects distance protection devices that have the state Calculated.
● Select No Data:
Selects distance protection devices that have the state No Data.
● Deselect All:
Removes all selections in the list.
● Refill Dialog:
Refills the list.
● Select:
Highlights the selected distance protection device in the network diagram.
● Localize:
This function is similar to Select, but the diagram section in the Graphics Editor is altered to
display the selected element.
● Apply:
The results of all the distance protection devices selected are added to the current device input
data.

Click Apply to close the dialog box. PSS SINCAL adds the calculated settings to the protection
devices you have selected. PSS SINCAL then uses these results as input data (settings) for the
protection devices.

When Apply boundary impedance is switched ON, PSS SINCAL uses the boundary impedance
along with other values. This means that the calculated settings Rk and Xk for the levels 1 to 3 are
transferred to the input data for the protection device.

254 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Examples

Results of Settings Calculations

PSS SINCAL calculates the settings for the protection device and then displays the following
screen form:

The settings for protection device D5 were used, and the state in the Type of Input Data field is
Calculated.

The state of the Type of Input Data field can be:

● No data:
This protection device still has no settings and no impedance areas for PSS SINCAL to use in
the protection simulation.
● Calculated:
PSS SINCAL has calculated the settings for this protection device. They can be overwritten.
● Manual:
The settings were entered by hand. This procedure will not modify the values.

PSS SINCAL calculates the settings and displays these in Calculated for Device D5 in the
browser. Click Calculated Settings to see the calculation results. These settings are always
available, whether or not the settings are used for the particular protection device.

In addition to settings, these calculation methods also generate diagrams as selective tripping
schedules. PSS SINCAL provides these in Diagram View under Protection Device Coordination
– DI Device Settings.

October 2019 255


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Examples

For a description of the calculation method, see the chapter on Calculation Procedure.

10.1.6 Checking Tripping Behavior for Protection Devices

PSS SINCAL simulates the starting and tripping behavior of all protection devices in the network.
PSS SINCAL considers both distance protection and overcurrent protection devices. For a detailed
description of this procedure, see the chapter on Protection Simulation.

Prerequisites

When checking tripping behavior, faults have to be observed in the network. Fault observations
symbolize faults in the network, for which PSS SINCAL checks the protection setting accuracy.
These can be connected to any network element (see the section on Making fault observations).

10.1.7 Starting the Protection Simulation

There are two types of calculations:

● Calculating all fault observations in the network


● Calculating a fault observation using the pop-up menu

Protection Coordination

The calculation is started either via Calculate – Protection Device Coordination – Protection or
directly via the pop-up menu of a selected fault observation. One of the following dialog boxes is
opened depending on the selection made via Short Circuit – Calculation Settings in the Short
Circuit Data Type (Sym. components or Phase values) field.

256 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Examples

The required simulation type can be set in the Simulation section of the dialog box.

The Return conductor fault and Ground fault options enable a connection between fault and
return conductor or ground to be activated.

Stability

The calculation is started either via Calculate – Protection Device Coordination – Stability or
directly via the pop-up menu of a selected fault observation. One of the following dialog boxes is
opened depending on the selection made via Short Circuit – Calculation Settings in the Short
Circuit Data Type (Sym. components or Phase values) field.

The required simulation type can be set in the Simulation section of the dialog box.

When modeling networks with phase values, it is possible to specify return conductor and ground
separately. The Return conductor fault and Ground fault options are used to define the fault
circuit. For more information on the fault circuits see chapter Short Circuit Calculation Method,
section Fault Circuits in the Short Circuit Manual.

Fault Events

As with multiple fault calculation, this calculation method enables the simultaneous simulation of
different faults in the network. This uses manually defined Fault Events, which combine any fault
observations into an event. The type of fault is likewise set here by the fault observation.

October 2019 257


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Examples

The calculation is started either via Calculate – Protection Device Coordination – Fault Event or
directly via the pop-up menu of a selected fault observation. This opens the following dialog box.

10.1.8 Displaying and Evaluating the Results

PSS SINCAL calculates the settings for the protection device and then displays the following
results in the Graphics Editor.

This example shows the results of the first loop for the fault observation in Line L8.

The protection devices at the beginning and the end of the line L8 have a "+". A plus means that
the settings that have been entered could trip the devices. PSS SINCAL also displays the devices
that have tripped in the simulation in red.

PSS SINCAL uses the following colors to designate tripping and pickup, when the filter evaluations
are active:

● Red – The protection device has tripped.


● Yellow – The protection device has been picked-up within the selective tripping time.
● Green – The protection device is picked-up.

PSS SINCAL searches for protection devices that can trip in each fault examination. These
comprise all protection devices that limit the fault going forward.

In the network diagram, PSS SINCAL marks with a "+" all protection devices that can trip. This is
independent of the current state of the protection device (not picked-up, picked-up, etc.).

In the network diagram, PSS SINCAL marks with an "x" all protection devices that are not
supposed to trip but do so.

258 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Examples

Selection of the Results with Toolbar

PSS SINCAL has a special toolbar to simplify selecting results. In protection simulation, select the
desired fault observation and flow in this toolbar. PSS SINCAL displays these results in the network
graphics and in the protection devices dialog box.

Activate this toolbar by clicking View – Toolbars – Results.

Information in the Message Box

In addition to the results displayed in the Graphics Editor, information can be obtained from
Messages.

The button HTML Log displays, as an HTML log, which protection devices in the current fault
observation and loop:

● May trip
● Have tripped
● Are picked-up or not picked-up

October 2019 259


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Examples

Results in Diagrams

In addition to the results displayed in the Graphics Editor and the information box, PSS SINCAL
generates results in diagram form. To view this information, click View – Diagram View.

The diagrams for tripping area and tripping characteristics can be combined in the browser. Select
the protection devices you want to display in the diagram. For a detailed description, see the
section on Overlay Tripping Characteristics in the chapter on Diagram View in the System Manual.

10.1.9 Generating Protection Routes

The protection routes can be used to check the correct setting of the protection devices. Protection
routes can be visualized in two ways:

● as diagrams
● in the network diagram

To generate protection routes, click Calculate – Protection Device Coordination – Routes.


Calculations can be started for 3-phase and 2-phase short circuits or 2-phase and 1-phase ground
circuits.

Protection-Route Diagrams

After the calculations, diagrams are created to check the correctness of the protection setting.

To view this information, click View – Diagram View.

260 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Examples

The simulation procedure generates the following protection-route diagrams:

● Tripping Behavior
● Ratio Impedances (Z)
● Ratio Reactances (X)
● Impedance and Tripping Areas

Note: In the diagrams for protection devices, PSS SINCAL can generate these diagrams only when
the output in the selective grading diagram is turned ON (see the section on Protection Location in
the chapter on Data Description in the Input Data Manual).

The calculation settings control how protection-route diagrams are displayed on the screen. You
can define, for example, the displayed protection route, using the field zones for selective
grading diagrams. For a detailed description, see the section on Protection Settings – Calculation
Settings in the chapter on Calculation Settings in the Input Data Manual.

The following diagram shows the tripping behavior of Protection Device D1.

This diagram shows the impedance of the protection route, as well as the node and additional built-
in protection devices in the x axis. The y axis contains the tripping time of the particular zone.

Protection devices that face "forward" are displayed in the diagram with negative time (i.e. below
the x axis). In the example above, these are devices D1G and D3G.

Coloring in the Network Diagram

If there are no errors in the protection route determination, PSS SINCAL automatically opens the
Protection Route results browser.

October 2019 261


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Examples

The Results browser can even be opened later by clicking View – Other Windows – Result
Browser or Calculate – Results – Protection Route in the menu. In the selection field, you can
switch ON the output display for Protection Route.

This loads the final results for contingency analysis and displays them in the results browser.

The Results browser has a filter field at the top to reduce the amount to be displayed in the list.

The list of options on top shows all the protection devices with calculated protection routes. When a
protection device is selected, PSS SINCAL displays all the calculated tripping zones with the
elements that belong to this protection device in the list of Tripping Zones. If more than one
protection device is selected, PSS SINCAL only displays the tripping zones. PSS SINCAL
immediately uses the settings in the Highlight section to highlight the protection route for the
selected protection device in the network diagram.

The pop-up menu provides enhanced editing functions.

262 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Examples

The following functions are available.

● Edit:
Opens the screen form of the attributes for the selected protection devices.
● Select:
Highlights the selected protection device in the network diagram.
● Localize:
This function is similar to Select, but the diagram section in the Graphics Editor is altered to
display the selected element.

The Tripping Zone section has a filter field to reduce the amount to be displayed in the list.

Tripping Zones displays all the tripping zones calculated for the selected protection devices with
the respective highlighting color. Simply click on a color to switch the highlighting for the tripping
zone ON or OFF. You first need to select Highlight protection route in the Highlight area. If only
one protection device has been selected in the upper list, PSS SINCAL displays the network
elements used along with each tripping zone.

The pop-up menu of the protection zones provides enhanced editing functions.

The following functions are available.

● Select:
Highlights the selected protection zone in the network diagram.
● Localize:
This function is similar to Select, but the diagram section in the Graphics Editor is altered to
display the selected element.
● Expand:
Opens the protection zone in the list.
● Collapse:
Closes the protection zone in the list.
● Show all:
Highlights all tripping zones for this protection device.
● Hide all:
Removes the highlighting for the tripping zones of this protection device.
● Format Zone:
Displays a dialog box where you can define a color for the tripping zone.

October 2019 263


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Examples

The pop-up menu of the protection zone elements provides enhanced editing functions.

The following functions are available.

● Edit:
Opens the screen form of the selected element.
● Select:
Highlights the selected element in the network diagram.
● Localize:
This function is similar to Select, but the diagram section in the Graphics Editor is altered to
display the selected element.

Highlight selects whether the protection route is highlighted for the selected protection devices. To
remove the highlighting in the network diagram, click No highlighting.

Click Options to display a dialog box for entering enhanced settings for highlighting.

Pen Width and Min. Pen Width can be entered in the Highlight Options section for highlighting
protection zones.

The Alpha option enables the opacity of the highlighting to be defined. Values between 0
(transparent) and 255 (fully opaque) can be set.

The program uses these settings to highlight the selected results. A temporary PIC file is created in
order to highlight the results according to the set pen width. Min. pen width sets the lower display
limit for the PIC file. If the PIC file in a small zoomed section has a pen width below this value,
PSS SINCAL displays the PIC file with the limit so you can see the highlighting in small zoomed
areas as well.

10.2 Example for Creating Protection Documentation


Below is a simple example of how Creating Protections Documentation works. The following
descriptions show:

● Selecting Grading
● Creating the Protection Documentation

264 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Examples

● Customizing a Diagram

Basic Data

All descriptions are based on the following example network. Generally speaking, however,
protection documentation can be for any network.

When you install PSS SINCAL, the program automatically provides a network ("Example OC"),
which can be used to check the simulation procedure.

PSS SINCAL allows protection documentation for all types of elements. But if you need additional
information such as, for example, input data and limits, the network has to have overcurrent
protection devices. This is why we have included them in this example.

October 2019 265


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Examples

10.2.1 Selecting Grading

For protection documentation you first need to select a grading in an individual view. This can be
done in a number of ways, such as, for example, manually, by selecting the route, etc.

10.2.2 Creating the Protection Documentation

After you have selected the grading, it is possible to create protection documentation. Click Tools –
Create Protection Documentation to activate the function.

Type selects whether a diagram page or a view is created. In this example a diagram page is
created.

Use the Name input field to define the diagram page of protection documentation (in this case
"PD 1") for the new view.

266 October 2019


SIEMENS PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination
Examples

The Page settings section lets the user select the desired paper format.

Additional options needed when creating protection documentation can be entered in the Network
Graphic section.

The option Create network diagram defines whether the diagram page will have grading.

When protection documentation is created as a view, the type of node can be defined with the
Node symbol list. PSS SINCAL has the following selection possibilities:

● Node:
All nodes of the grading are generated as simple nodes.
● Busbar:
All nodes of the grading are generated as busbars.
● Use type of node:
The generation depends on the node type, which is defined in the node's screen form.
Depending on what has been selected, PSS SINCAL generates either a node or a busbar
when the grading is created.
● Determine automatically:
The node type is automatically determined by means of the connected elements. If a node has
more than two terminals in the grading path, this produces a busbar.

Press OK to close the dialog box, and PSS SINCAL creates the protection documentation. This
switches ON Diagram View and selects the protection documentation diagram. The diagram page
displays the network graphics for the grading diagram selected along with the diagram.

PSS SINCAL automatically displays the following grading characteristics in the diagram:

● Tripping curves
● Damage curves
● Inrush curves

October 2019 267


PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination SIEMENS
Examples

● Motor start-up curves

10.2.3 Customizing a Diagram

Once the protection documentation is finished, you can add a diagram. To turn this function ON,
click Diagram – Customize Diagram Page in the menu.

In this example, the current ranges of the M1 OC protection device are added to the diagram.
Current Range (Phase) characteristics from the list of available data are added to the list of
selected data. Clicking OK closes the dialog box and displays these characteristics in the diagram.

For a detailed description of the dialog box, see the chapter on Customize Protection
Documentation in the System Manual.

268 October 2019

You might also like